Download Daily viewing - Tecnicosaurios
Transcript
This file is provided FREE OF CHARGE from the electromaniacs.com community You are free to distribute this file to other persons who needs it , but without of charge Also on http://electromaniacs.com you can find thousands of service manuals , schematics free of charge DEFLECTION CIRCUIT CHECK START TROUBLESHOOTING TV starts for a moment with EHT (at least 1s) and attempts 3 starts. Horizontal deflection repair routine ERROR CODE 28 Signal by LED. Vertical deflection repair routine Short circuit TL71?s Collector to GROUND. Check safety circuit components TL71,72, etc. TV now OK ? Vertical deflection repair routine TV now OK ? Check for open circuit horizontal deflection stage components. Horizontal deflection repair routine Check BCL components CL09. DL09, CL08 TL02,TL59 Check DL75 Open circuit DL74 Open circuit TL71 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr DEFLECTION CIRCUIT CHECK HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION REPAIR ROUTINE Open circuit pin 8 IP95 or short pin 4 of IP95 to GND Check the U-TIMER ~ 9v USYS ~ 70v / 5VUP ~ 5v +UA ~ 12v / U-VIDEO ~ 100v Connect pin 8 or remove short on pin 4 of IP95. Short circuit TL34 B/E. Short TL71 Col. to GND. Check for H_Drive on RV18, breifly visiable. TV now OK ? Yes No OK? IV01 repair routine Open circuit either pin 10 of the DST or JL60. Check power supply voltage as again. TV now OK ? No Yes Yes Check TL34 DL21, CL21 CL24, DST Check H drive pulse on pin1 of LL32. TV now OK ? No No Check H_Drive components RL35, RL36,TL31,TL32,TL33 Yes Check Short TL34 B/E. Check retrace pulse on the collector TL34 (probe 100:1) Go to 1 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr No deflection problem! refer to power supply DEFLECTION CIRCUIT CHECK 1 No OK? Check for short circuit DST supply lines 5Vdst, Vsupply, Vretrace check TL34, LL32 Check Modulator components Yes Check DST output voltages these should be least at 50% of the nominal value. Check 5VON, VSUPPLY,VRETRACE OK? No Check the following, ZL11/13 ZL14, DL11/13/14, TL14 Yes Check the Line Flyback pulse (LFB) during start-up. Briefly visible? No OK? Check flyback voltage on pin 8 of the DST. Check DL09, DL19, DV09 Yes Vertical deflection repair routine www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr DEFLECTION CIRCUIT CHECK VERTICAL DEFLECTION STAGE REPAIR ROUTINE V supply and V retrace was OK or >50% during start? No Check the following items:RL11/13, ZL11/13, DL11/13. Yes Vertival retrace visible on pin 7 IF01 during start ? OK ? No Check vertical guard signal on pin 34 of IV01, pulse with U>4V during retrace and <4V during scan visible. Yes Check Vetical Deflection IC pin resistance with TV "OFF" V supply (pin 3) > 5KOhm V retrace (pin 6) > 50KOhm Output A (pin 7) ~ 5,7KOhm Output B (pin 4) ~ 5,7KOhm OK ? Yes No OK ? No Change IF01 Yes Check pin 1 and 2 of IF01 vertical amplifier during start-up. At pin 1 approx. 3V DC and a visible sawtooth signal, on pin 2 approx. 3V DC. IV01 repair routine No OK ? Yes NO vertical problem !! www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr Yes DEFLECTION CIRCUIT CHECK IV 01 REPAIR ROUTINE Check RV01, CV03, RC02, CC03. Also check for short circuits on IV01 supply pins? No Is +8v present on pins 23 & 53 of IV01 at switch "On" ? Yes Yes Power supply or µP problem +5V on pin 55 & 6,8V on pin 19 IV01 No Check CC01, CI57 or IV01 defective. Yes Bus blocked or µP problem No I2C Bus transmission visible during start ? Yes IC not initialised or defect. Check crystals, bus protocol. No Sawtooth signal on pin 4 IV01 during start ? Yes Check safety circuit and EHT compensation signal No Pin 58 <6v & pin 3 <3V of IV01 during start ? Yes IV01 defect. ? www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr SECONDARY DC-VOLTAGES All measurements in this chapter must be done WITHOUT the mains supply connected to the TV. Test circuit: The external voltage source is provided by a variable DC-power supply with its output voltage set to 11V and the current limitation set to 500mA's. The negative terminal of the DC-power supply must be directly connected to the chassis secondary ground plane. The positive terminal of the DC-power supply is first connected to an ammeter and then the anode of an isolation diode. The cathode of the isolation diode is then connected to the load on the chassis as shown below. Measure the current drawn by each load tested. DP82 U-VIDEO DP84 +UA 0,5A 11V + DP80 U-SYS DP93 U-TIMER CHASSIS ICC17 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr STANDBY POWER SUPPLY - PRIMARY SIDE Short circuit pins 3 and 4 of LP50 and switch "ON" the mains supply. 230VAC at BP01 ? No Check mains plug-in & mains switch Yes CP10= 310VDC No FP01 Blown Yes No Check mains supply filter & bridge rectifier Yes Cathode DP20=42V No Check Standby rectifier DP16-19 RP20 and DP20 No Check CP26 and DP22 Replace FP01 & check TP50 & RP15 Yes Cathode DP22=5.2V Yes Check IP20 pin 1 for a 62kHz signal No Replace IP20 Yes General: All measurements must be taken with the TV connected to the mains supply via an Isolation Transformer. CP63=9.7V No Yes Primary side of Standby Power Supply should be OK. Check TP21 & LP20 Important information: If the over-voltage circuit was activated, you will have to change the fuse resistor at location RB/LB06 on the CRT-board. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr DEGAUSSING CIRCUIT Check degauss circuit. Switch "ON" the TV. Voltage CP13 > 4.5V No Check RP10 Yes Voltage RP12 > 1.2V No Check whether DP14 is open circuit Yes Voltage RP12 < 1.8V No Check whether DP14 is short circuit Yes Check connector BP15 & posistor RP15 Check TP14 and TP15 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr SECONDARY DC-VOLTAGES All measurements in this chapter must be done WITHOUT the mains supply connected to the TV. Test circuit: The external voltage source is provided by a variable DC-power supply with its output voltage set to 11V and the current limitation set to 500mA's. The negative terminal of the DC-power supply must be directly connected to the chassis secondary ground plane. The positive terminal of the DC-power supply is first connected to an ammeter and then the anode of an isolation diode. The cathode of the isolation diode is then connected to the load on the chassis as shown below. Measure the current drawn by each load tested. DP82 U-VIDEO DP84 +UA 0,5A 11V + DP80 U-SYS DP93 U-TIMER CHASSIS ICC17 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr STANDBY POWER SUPPLY - SECONDARY SIDE Short circuit pins 3 & 4 of LP50, short circuit CP69. Switch"ON" mains supply Check voltage across RP76 = 3.3V No Yes Check voltage across RP76 < 3.3V No Check the Keyboard PCB, DK01, CK02, GE01 (LED) and GK01 (IR-receiver) Yes Check the connection to the Keyboard and the voltages on KDB17000 Cathode IP61 > 5V No Yes No Check Standby rectifier DP16-19 and RP20 Yes Solder a 10K resistor from CP63 to gate IP61 voltage at cathode of IP61 goes from > 5V to < 2.5V Gate of IP61 < 2V Replace IP61 No Check IP50 and IP61 Yes Regulation circuit OK. After finishing this test, please remove the short circuits from pins 3/4 of LP50 and CP69 also remove the 10k resistor. General: All measurements must be taken with the TV connected to the mains supply via an Isolation Transformer. Important information: If the over-voltage circuit was activated, you have to replace the fuse resistor at location RB/LB06 on the CRT-board. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr POWER SUPPLY - SECONDARY SIDE : U-VIDEO Connect the test circuit to the cathode of DP82. Test current >200mA?s No No short circuit on U-VIDEO Yes Remove the cable inserted at BL02 (to CRT-board) Test current >200mA?s No Check on CRT-board the video amplifier IB01, DB30/31, DB50/51 & DB70/71. Reconnect cable in BL02 Yes Replace DP82 After finishing this test, please replace cable BL02 and remove the test circuit. General: All measurements must be taken with the TV connected to the mains supply via an Isolation Transformer. Important information: If the over-voltage circuit was activated, you have to replace the fuse resistor at location RB/LB06 on the CRT-board. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr POWER SUPPLY - SECONDARY SIDE : U-SYS Connect the test circuit to the cathode of DP80. Test current >500mA?s No No short circuit on U-SYS. Yes Remove JL60/LL60 Test current >500mA?s No Check TL34 Yes Replace DP80 After finishing this test, please replace JL60/LL60 and remove the test circuit. General: All measurements must be taken with the TV connected to the mains supply via an Isolation Transformer. Important information: If the over-voltage circuit was activated, you have to replace the fuse resistor at location RB/LB06 on the CRT-board. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr POWER SUPPLY - SECONDARY SIDE : U-TIMER Connect pin 4 of IP95 to ground. Connect the test circuit to the cathode of DP93. Test current >200mA?s No Yes No Check +5VUP and 5V_VCC rails Yes Measure +8V rail (at pin 8 of IP95) >1.3V Remove LL31 Test current >200mA?s Voltage at pin 9 of IP95 = 5.1V No Check line driver circuit, TL32, etc. Yes Check DP93 and IP95 Connect pins 4 and 9 of IP95. Test current >500mA?s Yes Check +8V rail to AP, DP, OS, SCART and KDB No Voltage at pin 8 of IP95 = 8.1V No Check voltage at pin 4 of IP95 and DP94 and CP96. Yes No short circuit on U-TIMER General: All measurements must be taken with the TV connected to the mains supply via an Isolation Transformer. Important information: If the over-voltage circuit was activated, After finishing this test, please replace LL31, remove the link between pins 4 and 9 of IP95 and remove the test circuit. you have to replace the fuse resistor at www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr location RB/LB06 on the CRT-board. POWER SUPPLY - SECONDARY SIDE : +UA Connect pin 4 of IP95 to ground. Connect the test circuit to the cathode of DP84. Test current >200mA?s No No short circuit on +UA rail. No Replace Audio Amplifier IS80. Yes Remove JP03 Test current >200mA?s Yes Remove DP84 Test current >200mA?s Check IP87 Check U-TIMER rail. No Replace DP84 General: All measurements must be taken with the TV connected to the mains supply via an Isolation Transformer. Important information: If the over-voltage circuit was activated, you have to replace the fuse resistor at location RB/LB06 on the CRT-board. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr AUDIO SIGNAL MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC - MODULE AUDIO DOLBY PROLOGIC - DOLBY PROLOGIC VERSTÄRKER - MODULO AUDIO DOLBY PROLOGIC ESQUEMA DEL MÕDULO AMPLIFICADOR DE AUDIO BA005 Cinch output CA001 1N0 RA001 100K0 RA002 100K0 RA003 470R0 CA005 1N0 6 5 Surround 4 CA002 1N0 RA005 100K0 RA004 470R0 CA003 4U7 BS003 Subwoofer 3 2 Right 1 Left BA005 Cinch output RA006 100K0 RA007 470R0 CA004 4U7 CA006 1N0 RA008 470R0 CA007 4U7 SUB AMDP RA016 4K7 CA014 4U7 RA014 4K7 CA008 4U7 Left CA013 4U7 CA011 1N0 9 RA015 4K7 3 1 11 RA017 1K0 8 RA048 22K0 4 5 CA017 470P0 5 RA070 TA021 BC847B 10K0 4 IA001 TDA7269 DA023 BZX55C3V6 3 2 1 CA054 1MI0 2 10 7 3 CA043 1MI0 RA021 18K0 RA071 10K0 DA070 LL4148 3 2 DA071 LL4148 RA072 10K0 RA073 120K0 RA074 4K7 DA074 LL4148 DA075 LL4148 RA081 5K6 RA031 1K0 RA023 15K0 CA031 1MI0 CA033 100N0 Right Left 1 1 5 2 Right 2 4 RA045 1K0 BA005 7 8 9 10 BA006 RA056 1K0 RA039 22K0 3 CA056 1N0 CA045 1N0 CA041 100N0 6 BA007 SA001 1 Left 2 RA041 4R7 RA027 100R0 RA150 100K0 Heatsink CA023 1U0 DA083 LL4148 RA025 18K0 RA029 15K0 1 TA072 BC847B CA109 470U0 CA105 220U0 RA105 470R0 CA101 1N0 CA103 1U0 CA104 1U0 CA102 1N0 CA106 1N0 RA109 47K0 RA111 47K0 RA107 120K0 RA106 120K0 CA074 100U0 RA077 22K0 TA077 BC847B RA078 1K2 CA080 100U0 RA113 6K8 IA003 MC33076/P1 CA035 470U0 RA082 6K8 RA036 560R0 RA083 5K6 RA079 10K0 CA090 1N0 CA078 100U0 RA094 4K7 CA092 4U7 Surround CA096 470P0 CA094 1U0 RA092 4K7 RA096 1K0 1 6 11 CA093 4U7 Center RA115 10K0 CA115 1N0 CA091 1N0 CA095 1U0 RA093 4K7 RA097 1K0 2 CA049 100N0 RA047 22K0 10 CA058 22N0 CA053 470U0 CA060 22N0 4 7 RA040 22K0 RA119 1K0 1 4 VEE 8 VCC INOUT 6 IN+ 7 + 5 4 VEE CA112 10U0 RA114 10K0 RA117 33R0 CA119 100U0 3 IA002 TDA7269 CA044 470U0 BA004 4 2 CA114 1N0 CA118 100U0 RA118 1K0 DA024 BZX55C3V6 RA028 100R0 CA032 1MI0 CA034 100N0 5 3 RA116 33R0 RA032 1K0 1 Left Headphones RA030 18K0 RA026 10K0 RA024 15K0 Right CA042 100N0 RA042 4R7 CA024 1U0 TA022 BC847B AMDP AM/DP.17000.00 RA022 18K0 AUDIO MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC Surround RA055 1K0 CA061 22N0 RA046 1K0 BA009 1 Center L 2 8 VCC OUT 11 12 13 14 8 5 CA097 470P0 RA095 4K7 BA005 RA049 4R7 RA037 560R0 9 CA113 10U0 IN- 2 IN+ + 3 CA107 1N0 TA080 BC857B RA076 22K0 RA112 6K8 First issue 07 / 98 CA050 100N0 6 6 DA073 LL4148 ICC17 1 7 BA002 GND + UA Mute RA018 1K0 8 RA080 120MI0 ICC17 RA050 4R7 RA038 560R0 CA015 1U0 RA013 4K7 10 BS02 CA018 470P0 CA016 1U0 9 10 Left Gnd Right Subwoofer Center Mute L/R Surround Mute Surr. Headph L Headph R CA012 1N0 Right BA001 1 RA035 560R0 CA036 470U0 CA064 22N0 BA008 1 2 Center R SUB AUDIO SIGNAL MODULE - SUB MODULE AUDIO - AUDIO SIGNAL SUBMODUL - SUB MODULO AUDIO 64 58 33 BS002 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 PINS of MSP 55 SC2OUTR AGND CS207 100N0 CS206 10U0 DGND CS209 100N0 1 +8V CS208 3U3 SC2OUTL SC1OUTR CAPLA SC1OUTL CAPLM AGNDC SC4INL SC4INR AGND SC3INL SC3INR SC2INL SC2INR SC1INL SC1INR VREFTOP MONOIN +5VA ANAIN1+ ANAIN- ANAIN2+ SUB AUDIO MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC XTALIN XTALOUT DGND 1 AGND 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 CS210 10U0 CS201 220N0 AGND CS106 AGND 1N0 +5VD DACMC IS200 DPL3518(DIE) 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 +5VA AGND +5VD RESETQ I2SDAOU2 I2SDAIN2 DVSS DVSS DVSUP DVSUP NP NC NC NC I2SDAIN1 I2SDAOU1 I2SWS I2SCL I2CDA I2CCL CS211 10U0 AVSUP NC NC NC TESTEN XTALIN XTALOUT DCTRIN AUDCLOUT NP NP NP DCTRIO1 DCTRIO0 ADRSEL STANDBYQ NP 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MSP3410D(DIE) 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 CAPLC1 AHVSUP AHVSUP CAPLC2 SC1OUTL SC1OUTR VREF1 VREF1 SC2OUTL SC2OUTR ASG3 DACC1L DACC1R VREF2 VREF2 DACC2L DACC2R DACMSURR IS100 AVSUP AVSUP ANAIN1+ ANAINANAIN2+ TESTEN XTALIN XTALOUT DMACSYNC AUDCLOUT NP NP NP DCTROUT1 DCTROUT0 ADRSEL STANDBYQ NP CS203 1N0 CS204 10N0 CS205 +5VD Mute L/R Surround Mute Surr. 5 6 7 8 Headph R Center 10 Subwoofer 4 9 Right 3 2 Left 1 32 31 DACML 30 DACMR 29 DACAL 26 28 DACAR 25 27 RESETQ 24 DACC2L 23 22 21 20 19 18 +5VD 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 9 10 I2CCL 8 ADRSEL 6 7 DCTROUT0 5 I2CDA BS001 32 100N0 DGND +5VD BS003 BA001 AMDP 1 DGND 1 AGND 10 100N0 3 PINS of MSP 2 10N0 CS105 DCTROUT1 1N0 CS104 4 DGND Headph L CS103 1 AGND AHVSS CAPLM AHVSUP AVHSUP CAPLA SC1OUTL SC1OUTR VREF1 VREF1 SC2OUTL SC2OUTR ASG3 TESTNEU DACMSUB DACML DACMR VREF2 VREF2 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 +8V DACAL DACAR RESETQ I2SDAIN2 DVSS DVSS DVSUP DVSUP ADRCL ADRWS NP ADRDA I2SDAIN1 I2SDAOU1 I2SWS I2SCL I2CDA I2CCL 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 AHVSS AHVSS AGNDC SC3INL SC3INR ASG2 SC2INL SC2INR ASG1 SC1INL SC1INR VREFTOP VREFTOP MONOIN AVSS AVSS AVSUP SUB AMDP 17001 00 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 +8V 10N0 SUB AMDP AHVSS AGNDC SC4INL SC4INR ASG3 SC3INL SC3INR ASG1 SC2INL SC2INR ASG0 SC1INL SC1INR VREFTOP VREFTOP MONOIN AVSS AVSS CS101 220N0 DGND CS202 CS102 10N0 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 DGND DACMSUB AGND TP1 DGND TP2 ICC17 First issue 07 / 98 KEY BOARD AND FRONT CONNECTOR BOARD MODULE PRISE EN FACADE ET INTERCONNEXION DU CLAVIER TASTATUR UND FRONT ANSCHLUSSPLATTE - PIASTRA CONNESSIONE PLACA TECLADO Y CONECTORES FRONTALES SK01 1 3 4 3 2 4 PR- Vol+ SK02 SK03 BK01 9 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 PR+ VolJK01 KEY_IN_1 KEYB_B 6 KEYB_A 1 5 4 RK01 1K0 +5V_STBY 3 1 RE03 2 3 A2 100R0 C 2 1 G RK02 270R0 CK02 22U0 16V KEY_IN_2 7 JK02 GND Vss OUT 3 2 8 GK01 TFMK1330-D-T 2 SK04 1 DK01 BZX55C5V1 R IR +8V U_STBY A1 GE01 LU5351-JM DE01 BZX55C2V7 KDB 17000 00 BJ10 CJ02 1U0 6 VIDEO 5 4 R CJ04 470P0 RJ04 47K0 CJ03 470P0 RJ03 47K0 3 AUDIO 2 L 1 BJ04 1 CJ01 1U0 L 2 3 RJ20 220R0 1 3 5 4 2 VIDEO CHROMA. R CHROMA 4 BJ11 RJ21 75R0 5 6 VIDEO CJ20 22P0 RJ05 220R0 BQ12 8 7 2 3 4 5 1 CJ05 NI RQ05 330R0 RQ06 RQ03 330R0 RQ01 330R0 CQ01 10U0 CQ05 470P0 RJ06 75R0 BQ09 1 2 330R0 3 CQ03 3N3 CQ04 3N3 RQ04 330R0 RQ02 330R0 CQ02 10U0 4 5 FCB 17001 00 CQ06 470P0 L L FCB-GND R R FCB.17000.00 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr GENERAL INFORMATION - LED BEHAVIOUR CODES DEFAUTS LED FLASHES Message transmission. The Error codes are signalled by the TV’s red LED. Count the number of flashes : error code is two burst sepera ted by a pause of 0.7sec. and repeated four times.. There is 1.7 sec. between each codes sequence . 14 IC TDA8855H DOES NOT ANSWER 15 AUDIO PROCESSOR NO LONGER RESPONDING. 21 SDA LINE BEING HELD LOW 23 CLOCK JAMMED AT LOW LEVEL, SCL LINE JAMMED AT LOW LEVEL. 25 SWITCHED 5V NOT AVAILABLE 26 TUBE DOES NOT GET WARM IN TIME 27 THE DETECTION SYSTEM HAS DETECTED PROTECTION ON MORE THAN THREE OCCASIONS orange pause 0,7 sec. 1,7 sec. green 2 4 orange 0,7 sec. (DOES THIS MEAN THAT A PROBLEM HAS BEEN DETECTED ON THE BREATING LINE?). 1,7 sec. green pause 250ms 28 SCANNING PROBLEM AFTER 2 S, THE PROGRAM TRIES TO PERFORM A START. 34 THE NVM CHIP DOES NOT ANSWER 36 WRONG NVRAM ADDRESS PASSED TO THE BUS-HANDLER 37 UNEXPECTED LEVEL ON NMI (INTERRUPT) LINE FOUND (POSSIBLE CAUSE : TUBE FLASHOVER) 41 BUS (DATA LINE) NOT RECOVERABLE 250ms red pause 0,7 sec. 1,7 sec. off 3 4 red 0,7 sec. 1,7 sec. off pause currently all known ICC17 TV sets are fitted with a Bicoloured LED, the red part is the Standby LED whilst, the green part is directly connected to the switched +8V supply. Therefore,the colour of the LED will depend upon the state of this voltage,the chart below gives the corresponding LED-colours: switched +8V on off LED-port off on green orange off red LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS - LISTE DES ABREVIATIONS- ABKÜRZUNGEN LISTA DELLE ABBREVIAZIONI - LISTA DE ABREVIACIONES +USYS: System voltage ● +U_VIDEO: Video drive voltage for the CRT board ● + STDBY_ ON: Standby data (0V standby , 0.6v switched ON) ● +5V DST: 5v unregulated voltage from the DST ● to supply the tuner and audio MSP device ● +5V ON: 5v regulated voltage from the DST to supply the tuner and audio MSP device ● +5V UP : Microprocessor supply voltage ● BCL: Beam current limiting information ● CVBS: Composite video / luminance signal ● CVBS_OUT: Composite video output ● CVBS_TXT: Composite video for teletext extraction ● DEGAUSS: Degauss signal ● EW : East / West ● FORMAT / BC: Full white control DATA depending on 16/9 selected format ● HDRV: Horizontal deflection signal ● HTR1 / HTR2: Heater voltage from the DST to CRT PCB ● LFB: L ine Fast Blanking ● MUTE : Mutes audio amplifiers ● PO: “Power ON “ IP95 : reset activated and output = 8v “PO” = 5v when TV is working in normally ● POWER_FAIL: Detection of mains supply and deflection stage failures ● RESET: Microprocessor reset signal ● SAFETY: Safety information from the deflection stage ● SCL: Serial Clock ● SDA : Serial Data ● SIF: Sound IF ● TRAP_INFO: 31.4Mhz IF trap activation ● U_ STANDBY: Standby voltage ● U_DRIVER: Horizontal sync signal from TDA8855H ● U_TIMER: 11v voltage used during “Switch ON “ phase and “Wake Up“ mode ● V FLB: Vertical flyback reference for the microprocessor ● V GUARD: Safety data generated by the vertical amplifier TDA 8351 ● V_RETRACE: 42 / 48volts (depending on tube type) generated by the DST and used for vertical blanking ● V_SUPPLY: www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 13.5 to 15.5 volts (depending on tube type) generated by the DST INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND TRANSISTORS OUTLINE CIRCUITS INTEGRES ET TRANSISTORS INTEGRIERTE SCHALTUNGEN UND TRANSISTOREN CIRCUITI INTEGRATI TRANSISTOR CIRCUITOS INTEGRADOS Y TRANSISTORES 1 64 32 41 65 16 40 17 80 MX27C200MC-12 25 1 24 ST92R195 MPS3400C-PP-C6 32 14 33 13 52 1 TDA8351 53 64 TDA8855H 11 9 7 5 8 10 8 1 TDA7269 9 7 5 3 2 6 4 6 4 3 1 E C B BUH516TH16 2 TDA6107Q TDA 8139 BC 847B BC 857B BCR141 BCR191 DTC113ZK DTC144EK TN1401 ST24C08-M TS3702CD STP6 NA60F1 BT806 -600C MC7812/CT E B C B C E BD241C BC 337 BC 546B BC 547B BF 422 BF423 2SA1020Y 2SC2236Y www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr MPS750 INTEGRATED CIRCUITS BLOCK DIAGRAMS SYNOPTIQUES INTERNES DES CIRCUITS INTEGRES INTEGRIERTE SCHALTUNGEN BLOCKSCHALTBILDER SCHEMA A BLOCCHI DEI CIRCUITI INTEGRATI VISTA INTERNA DE LOS CIRCUITOS INTEGRADOS Audio baseband processing of the MSP3410 SC A RT 1 SC A RT 2 SC A RT 3 MONO SC 1 O U T D C -FM 1 SC 2 O U T A FM O FF 50u N D C -FM 2 N IC A M LS OUT E FFE C T S A J17 BEEP SB U S12 J17 HP OUT A SB U S34 J17 I2S I2S O U T A QP L Sound IF ANA_IN1+ ANA_IN2+ Sound IF Mono_IN SC1_IN_L SC1_IN_R SC2_IN_L SC2_IN_R SC3_IN_L SC3_IN_R 58 60 DEMODULATOR 13 S1..4 14 I2S_CL I2S_WS I2S_DA_OUT 16 SBUS Interface I2S_DA_IN S_CL 17 15 S_ID S_DA_OUT 20 S_DA_IN QP R 11 12 I2S Interface FM1 FM2 NICAM1 NICAM2 MSP3410 I2S L/R LS L D/A LS R D/A Headphone L D/A Headphone R D/A 29 DACN_L 28 DACN_R DFP 55 IDENT 52 FM1 26 DACA_L 25 DACA_R 53 49 A/D Scart_L 50 A/D Scart_R 37 Scart_L D/A Scart_R D/A 36 34 46 33 47 SCART Switching Facilities SC1_OUT_L SC1_OUT_R SC2_OUT_L SC2_OUT_R Detection part of the MSP 3410 Stereo Detection Filter ID EN T Level Detect AM Demodulation Stereo Detection Register Bilingual Detection Filter Level Detect www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr IV01 TDA 8855H TUNER 13 1 6 VIF AMPLIFIER AGC FOR IF + PLL DEMOD + TUNER +8V SDA H-DRIVE 17 TOP 18 59 I2C - BUS 28 25 61 23 SYNC SEP. TRANSCEIVER 53 19 58 VCO +1st LOOP 57 56 2nd LOOP +CONTROL EW - GEOMETRY HOR. OUT HOR. OUT POL 62 EW 3 EHT 63 VERICAL SYNC. H / V VERTICAL AMPLIFIER DAC's SEPARATOR DIVIDER GEOMETRY TDA8855H AFC MUTE IDENTIF. VIDEO IDENT VIDEO CHROM TRAP MUTE + BANDPASS FILTER TUNING 64 V-DRIVE CONTR. CONTROL WHITE P 15 VIDEO BRI AFC 33 CONTINUOUS RGB CONTROL CATHODE BLUE STRETCH CALIBRATOR OUTPUT R 32 G 31 REF B 34 BEAM CURR. 30 BLACK CURR. SW 35 R1 SIF QSS MIXER CVBS Y/C LUMA DELAY BLACK STRETCH 36 G1 AMPLIFIER AM DEMOD. SWITCH PEAKING RGB MATRIX 37 B1 CORING RGB-1 INPUT 38 BL1 8 10 27 11 SWITCH PAL/NTSC BASE-BAND RGB-2 INPUT CD MATRIX SECAM DELAY LINE RGB/YUV SAT. CONTROL MATRIX SKIN TINT DECODER 16 24 SOUND TRAP 29 54 26 20 CHR. 60 CVBS SW 21 CVBS/Y AGC SAT CVBS OUT 22 SW.OUT AM OUT SW.OUT HUE CVBS OUT 9 CVBS IN www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr SIF - IN 2 7 INTERCARR. OUT IF - IN 14 SCL 53 51 50 55 49 Fsc 41 R2 42 43 44 G2 40 45 B2 BL2 46 47 39 V U Y BLOCK DIAGRAM (AUDIO MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC) SCHEMA SYNOPTIQUE (AUDIO MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC) BLOCKSCHALTBILD (AUDIO MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC) SCHEMA A BLOCCI (AUDIO MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC) ESQUEMA DE BLOQUES (AUDIO MODULE DOLBY PROLOGIC) BLOCKDIAGRAM: audio module dolby prologic BA005c L& R Subwoofer Surround BA002 C u r r ent L i m i t er GND + Us BA005d + Ua M ute 3 Right IA001 11 2 BA005a Ex t ernal speaker BA006 Internal speaker BA005a Ex t ernal speaker SA 0 0 1 Left 7 4 BA007 6 Internal speaker 5 BA001 Lef t M u t e Circuit + Us Right Subwoofer Center 3 IA002 11 2 BA008/ BA009 Center 7 4 BA005b Surround M ute_L/ R Surround M ute_surr 6 Headphones L& R 5 M u t e Circuit IA003 BA004 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr Headphones Interface requirement audio part with Dolby Prologic Left Right Center Subwoofer DP L 3520 A MSP3410 D Audio_clock Headphone D/A Channel 1 D/A Demod. IF input I/O Switching Part A/D AM and Scart in I2Sout I2S1 in I2S1 in I2Sout DSP (Dolby + effect) Loudspeaker D/A Mute L/ R Mute Surr Left Channel 2 D/A Right Not Surround Used Block diagram Dolby Prologic Dolby Prologic COB (IS40) AV1 out +5V AV2 out IIC Bus 2 RESET MSP +8V SIF MSP 3410 D AV1 in Left 2 AV2 in Right 2 Headphone Left AV3 in Headphone Right 2 Mute L/R AM AF Mute Surround BS003 IISBus Clock Center RESETQ Surround DPL 3520 IIC Bus Subwoofer +5V Block diagram Virtual Dolby TDA 7269 Headphones +5V 2 IIC Bus 2 2 2 2 Loudspeakers RESET MSP +8V SIF Mute Circuit MSP 3410 D AV1 out AV1 in 2 2 AV2 in 2 AV2 out AV3 in 2 2 AM AF IISBus RESETQ IIC Bus DPL 3518 +5V Virtual Dolby COB +UA MUTE www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr ICC17 First issue 07 / 98 EXTENDED SYMPTOM CODE (*1) CONDITION CODE IRIS REPAIR CODING SYSTEM MAIN SYMPTOM CODE 1 NO ACTION IN A HOT ENVIRONMENT 5 IN A COLD ENVIRONMENT 6 WHEN SWITCHING 7 UNDER VIBRATION 8 IN A DAMP/WET ENVIRONMENT 9 IN A DRY ENVIRONMENT A AFTER BEING DROPPED B AFTER LIGHTNING STRIKE C ONLY CERTAIN STATION(S)/SOFTWARE/ MODE D ONLY ON CERTAIN STANDARDS E ONLY ON ONE CHANNEL F ONLY WITH CERTAIN INPUT(S) G ONLY ON CERTAIN OUTPUT(S) H IN STANDBY/OFF MODE J AT EDIT POINT K WHEN INTERCONNECTED L LIQUID CONTAMINATION X NO SYMPTOM OR PROBLEM FOUND 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 11A 11B 11X NO POWER ON AC NO POWER WHEN USING AC-ADAPTER NO POWER WHEN USING DRY BATTERIES NO POWER WHEN USING RECHARGEABLE BATTERIES NO POWER FROM SOLAR CELL NO POWER WHEN USING A CAR BATTERY SHORT OPERATION TIME/SHORT BATTERY LIFE POWER-OFF FUNCTION NOT WORKING NO SWITCH-ON FROM STANDBY POWERS UP, BUT NO OPERATION CYCLIC POWER ON/OFF OTHER POWER PROBLEM 210 NO RECEPTION 2 COMMUNICATION 4 1 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 21X NO AM RECEPTION NO FM RECEPTION NO SW RECEPTION NO VHF RECEPTION NO UHF RECEPTION NO BS RECEPTION NO CS RECEPTION NO HDTV RECEPTION NO QPS RECEPTION OTHER 'NO RECEPTION' PROBLEM 310 NO PICTURE 3 PICTURE AFTER A WHILE 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 31X NO PICTURE IN E TO E MODE NO PICTURE IN PLAYBACK MODE NO PICTURE IN VIEWFINDER NO PICTURE, ONLY RASTER NO RASTER, BLACK PICTURE ONLY HORIZONTAL LINE ONLY VERTICAL LINE OTHER 'NO PICTURE' PROBLEM 410 NO COLOUR 4 COLOUR 3 411 412 413 414 41X NO COLOUR IN E TO E MODE NO COLOUR IN PLAYBACK MODE NO COLOUR IN VIEWFINDER NO COLOUR IN PART OF PICTURE OTHER 'NO COLOUR' PROBLEM 510 NO AUDIO 5 AUDIO INTERMITTENTLY 511 512 513 51X NO SOUND IN E TO E MODE NO PLAYBACK OF OUTGOING MESSAGE(S) NO PLAYBACK OF INCOMING MESSAGE(S) OTHER 'NO AUDIO' PROBLEM 610 NO MECHANICAL OPERATION 6 MECHANISM CONSTANTLY 2 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 1 GENERAL 110 POWER PROBLEM 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 61A 61X NO DISC ROTATION NO FORWARD OPERATION NO REVERSE OPERATION NO FAST FORWARD OR REWIND FUNCTION NO LOADING NO UNLOADING OR EJECTING OF TAPE NO AUTO SHUT-OFF OPERATION TONEARM DOES NOT MOVE DISC NOT BEING EJECTED MAGAZINE DOES NOT EJECT OTHER 'NO MECHANICAL OPERATION' PROBLEM 7 (*1) DATA PROCESSING 710 NO DATA PROCESSING CAUTION THE 'X' EXTENDED SYMPTO AVAILABLE IN THE CONCERNED SYMPTOM GROUP 8 PRINTING ONLY BE USED TO INDICATE DESCRIPTION IS NOT 717 718 71X NO INITIAL SCREEN SYSTEM DOES NOT RESET SYSTEM DOES NOT BOOT UP NO OPERATION FROM PLUG-IN MODULE NO KEYBOARD OPERATION NO OPERATION FROM OTHER INPUT/OUTPUT NO DATA STORAGE OPERATION NO DATA COMMUNICATION OTHER 'NO DATA PROCESSING' PROBLEM 810 NO PRINTER OPERATION CODES (*-**X) SHOUL THAT A SUITABLE SYMPTOM 711 712 713 714 715 716 811 812 813 814 815 81X NOT PRINTING NO COMMUNICATION WITH PRINTER PAPER NOT LOADING NO PAPER FEED NO IMAGE FIXATION OTHER NO PRINTER OPERATION PROBLEM 2 LEVEL 120 CHARGING PROBLEM 121 122 12X NO BATTERY CHARGING INCOMPLETE BATTERY CHARGE OTHER CHARGING PROBLEM 3 QUALITY 130 DISPLAY FUNCTION PROBLEM 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 13X FAULTY TIMER/COUNTER DISPLAY FAULTY LAMP/LED OPERATION FAULTY LEVEL METER OPERATION FAULTY ON-SCREEN DISPLAY OPERATION ELECTRONIC TUNING DISPLAY FAULT MECHANICAL TUNING DISPLAY FAULT FAULTY TIME CODE DISPLAY FAULTY ALARM/ERROR DISPLAY DISPLAY DIM OTHER DISPLAY FUNCTION PROBLEM 4 NOISE 140 ABNORMAL NOISE 141 142 143 144 145 146 14X CRT DISCHARGING NOISE EHT DISCHARGING NOISE NOISY CABINET NOISY TRANSFORMER NOISY COMPONENT(S) RATTLE OTHER ABNORMAL NOISE SYMPTOM CODE TABLE 5 UNSTABLE 150 REMOTE CONTROL PROBLEM 151 152 153 154 15X NO REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION INCORRECT REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION REMOTE CONTROL PROGRAMMING/ LEARNING MODE PROBLEM POOR REMOTE CONTROL SENSITIVITY OTHER REMOTE CONTROL PROBLEM 6 160 PHYSICAL DAMAGE 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 16A 16B 16C 16X 220 POOR RECEPTION 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 22X POOR AM RECEPTION POOR FM RECEPTION POOR SW RECEPTION POOR VHF RECEPTION POOR UHF RECEPTION POOR BS RECEPTION POOR CS RECEPTION POOR HDTV RECEPTION POOR QPS RECEPTION OTHER 'POOR RECEPTION' PROBLEM 230 TRANSMISSION PROBLEM 231 232 233 234 235 23X NO TRANSMISSION POOR TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION LEVEL TOO HIGH NO TRANSMISSION BETWEEN BASE UNIT AND HANDSET POOR TRANSMISSION BETWEEN BASE UNIT AND HANDSET OTHER TRANSMISSION PROBLEM 240 NOISY RECEPTION/ TRANSMISSION 241 242 243 24X LINE NOISE OSCILLATION INTERSTATION INTERFERENCE OTHER NOISE RECEPTION/TRANSMISSION PROBLEM 320 PICTURE LEVEL PROBLEM 330 PICTURE QUALITY PROBLEM 340 PICTURE NOISE 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 32X 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 33A 33X 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 34X PICTURE TOO DARK PICTURE TOO BRIGHT CONTRAST TOO LOW CONTRAST TOO HIGH SATURATED WHITE OR BLACK LEVEL SHADING ON PICTURE ONLY PARTIAL PICTURE OTHER PICTURE LEVEL PROBLEM 420 COLOUR LEVEL PROBLEM 421 422 42X WEAK COLOUR EXCESSIVE COLOUR OTHER COLOUR LEVEL PROBLEM 520 AUDIO LEVEL PROBLEM 521 522 523 524 525 52X LOW AUDIO LEVEL EXCESSIVE AUDIO LEVEL BALANCE PROBLEM FADER PROBLEM AUDIO LEVEL REMAINING OTHER AUDIO LEVEL PROBLEM 620 IRREGULAR MECHANICAL OPERATION 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 62A 62X IRREGULAR ROTATION IRREGULAR FORWARD MODE IRREGULAR REVERSE OPERATION IRREGULAR FAST FORWARD OR REWIND FUNCTION IRREGULAR LOADING IRREGULAR UNLOADING OR EJECTING OF TAPE IRREGULAR AUTO SHUT-OFF OPERATION IRREGULAR TONEARM MOVEMENT IRREGULAR EJECTION OF DISC IRREGULAR DIRECTION CHANGE OTHER 'IRREGULAR MECHANICAL OPERATION' PROBLEM 720 FAULTY DATA PROCESSING OPERATION 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 72X INCORRECT DATA SYSTEM RESET WHILE BEING USED SYSTEM LOCKS OUT/CRASHES FAULTY OPERATION OF PLUG-IN MODULE FAULTY KEYBOARD OPERATION FAULTY OPERATION OF OTHER INPUT/OUTPUT FAULTY DATA STORAGE OPERATION FAULTY DATA COMMUNICATION OTHER 'FAULTY DATA PROCESSING' PROBLEM 820 ERRONEOUS PRINTER OPERATION 821 822 823 82X PRINT IMAGE REVERSED (NEGATIVE/ POSITIVE) IRREGULAR PAPER FEED ERRONEOUS PRINT MODE SWITCHING OTHER PRINTER OPERATION PROBLEM POOR PICTURE RESOLUTION POOR FOCUS RINGING ON PICTURE EXCESSIVE SMEAR/LAG POOR LINEARITY OR GEOMETRY PICTURE SIZE INCORRECT INCORRECT CENTRING OF PICTURE PICTURE SLANTED V-SIZE INCORRECT H-SIZE INCORRECT OTHER PICTURE QUALITY PROBLEM 430 POOR COLOUR QUALITY 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 43X SOME OR ALL COLOURS MISSING POOR WHITE BALANCE HUE PROBLEM PURITY ERROR LANDING ERROR CONVERGENCE ERROR REGISTRATION ERROR PITCH MOIR… OTHER COLOUR QUALITY PROBLEM 530 AUDIO QUALITY 531 532 533 534 53X POOR FREQUENCY RESPONSE DISTORTED AUDIO NO OR POOR TREBLE NO OR POOR BASS OTHER AUDIO QUALITY PROBLEM 630 SPEED PROBLEM 631 632 63X SPEED TOO FAST SPEED TOO SLOW OTHER SPEED PROBLEM 730 DATA DISPLAY PROBLEM 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 73X 251 252 25X 441 442 44X COLOUR NOISE ON A BLACK & WHITE PICTURE COLOUR STREAKING OTHER COLOUR NOISE PROBLEM 540 NOISY AUDIO 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 54X HUM HISS CROSSTALK STATIC, POP OR CLICK NOISE BUZZ SCRATCHING NOISE IGNITION NOISE MULTIPATH NOISE OTHER AUDIO NOISE PROBLEM 640 MECHANICAL NOISE 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 64X INCORRECT PRINTING POSITION LOW PRINT CONTRAST EXCESSIVE PRINT CONTRAST BLURRED PRINT IMAGE PRINT IMAGE NOT SHARP DOTS MISSING-IN PRINT IMAGE OTHER PRINT QUALITY PROBLEM 260 TUNING PROBLEM 261 262 263 264 26X PRINTING NOISE LINES DIRTY PRINTING OTHER NO I S Y P R I N T I N G PROBLEM 178 17X FAULTY CLOCK FUNCTION FAULTY SLEEP FUNCTION FAULTY TIMER PROGRAMMING FAULTY TIMER RECORDING SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING PROBLEM FAULTY RECORD MUTE OPERATION FAULTY PROGRAMMED PLAYBACK OPERATION FAULTY MEMORY FUNCTION OTHER GENERAL FUNCTION PROBLEM 270 SPECIAL COMMUNICATION PROBLEM 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 27X FAULTY DIALLING FAULTY CHANNEL SELECTION FAULTY AUTO-ANSWER OPERATION FAULTY MESSAGE READ-OUT FUNCTION FAULTY AUTODIAL MEMORY FAULTY SPEECH PROCESSING NO RINGING TONE WEAK RINGING TONE OTHER SPECIAL COMMUNICATION PROBLEM 370 SPECIAL PICTURE FUNCTION PROBLEM 361 362 363 371 372 373 355 356 357 358 450 UNSTABLE COLOUR 451 452 453 454 45X COLOUR FLASHING HUE CONSTANTLY CHANGING FLICKERING COLOUR COLOUR NOT LOCKED OTHER UNSTABLE COLOUR PROBLEM 550 UNSTABLE AUDIO 551 552 553 554 555 556 55X JUMPING OR REPEATING AUDIO AUDIO PUMPING OR BREATHING AUDIO DROPOUTS CYCLIC AUDIO MUTING WOW AND FLUTTER HOWLING/ACOUSTIC FEEDBACK OTHER UNSTABLE AUDIO PROBLEM 364 365 366 36X NO PICTURE RECORDING NO ERASURE PROTECTION FOR VIDEO PREVIOUS VIDEO RECORDING NOT BEING ERASED UNWANTED ERASURE OF PICTURE NO CAMERA RECORDING ONLY ONE FIELD PER FRAME BEING RECORDED OTHER PICTURE RECORDING PROBLEM 460 POOR COLOUR RECORDING 461 46X NO COLOUR RECORDING OTHER COLOUR RECORDING PROBLEM 560 POOR AUDIO RECORDING 561 562 563 564 565 56X AUDIO NOT BEING RECORDED NO ERASURE PROTECTION FOR AUDIO PREVIOUS AUDIO RECORDING NOT BEING ERASED UNWANTED ERASURE OF AUDIO MESSAGE NOT BEING RECORDED OTHER AUDIO RECORDING PROBLEM 660 DAMAGE TO SOFTWARE 650 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 66X TAPE GETS SCRATCHED DISC GETS SCRATCHED TAPE GETS CHEWED/WRINKLED TAPE JAMMED OR BROKEN TAPE GETS CURLED SLACK TAPE TAPE STICKING OTHER SOFTWARE DAMAGE PROBLEM 760 DATA READ/WRITE PROBLEM 761 762 763 76X 841 842 84X 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 360 POOR PICTURE RECORDING SYNC PROBLEM PICTURE PUMPING PICTURE JITTER PICTURE SHAKING (HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL) FLICKERING PICTURE FLASHING PICTURE CYCLIC PICTURE MUTING HEAD IMPACT ERROR CAUSING UNSTABLE PICTURE VCR SKEW ERROR FROZEN PICTURE JUMPING/REPEATING PICTURE OTHER 'UNSTABLE PICTURE' PROBLEM 750 840 NOISY PRINTING MANUAL TUNING PROBLEM AUTOMATIC TUNING PROBLEM INCORRECT TUNING TUNING MEMORY PROBLEM OTHER TUNING PROBLEM SPECIAL FUNCTIONS 351 352 353 354 ROTATION NOISE MOTOR NOISE WIND NOISE TAPE SQUEALING FAN NOISE DISC SCRAPING NOISY TAPE LOADING OTHER MECHANICAL NOISE PROBLEM 740 DAMAGED CABINET DAMAGED HANDLE DAMAGED CONTROL KNOB(S)/BUTTON(S) DAMAGED DOOR/COVER DAMAGED SEAL DAMAGED PLUG OR SOCKET DAMAGED LENS DAMAGED CARTRIDGE OR STYLUS DAMAGED ANTENNA DAMAGED CRT OR VIEWFINDER MISSING COMPONENT(S) OR ORNAMENTAL PARTS PRINTED MARKINGS ERASED/PEELED OFF OTHER PHYSICAL DAMAGE 7 FORMATTING PROBLEM DATA ON STORAGE MEDIUM BEING LOST FRAME MEMORY PROBLEM OTHER DATA READ/WRITE PROBLEM 850 UNSTABLE PRINTER OPERATION 860 RIBBON/PAPER PROBLEMS 851 852 853 85X UNSTABLE PAPER LOADING UNSTABLE MULTI-PAPER LOADING INCORRECT LINE-UP OF CHARACTERS OTHER UNSTABLE PRINTER OPERATION PROBLEM 861 862 863 864 865 86X RIBBON BROKEN RIBBON STUCK/STICKING RIBBON DERAILED PAPER STUCK/STICKING TO MECHANISM PAPER JAM OTHER RIBBON/PAPER PROBLEM 8 OTHER CONDITIONS 170 GENERAL FUNCTION PROBLEM 180 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS 350 UNSTABLE PICTURE 359 35A 35B 35X 440 NOISY COLOUR TUNING DRIFT FADING OTHER UNSTABLE RECEPTION/ TRANSMISSION PROBLEM INCORRECT CHARACTER DISPLAY MISSING DISPLAY CHARACTERS FAULTY GRAPHIC DISPLAY FAULTY SWITCHING BETWEEN GRAPHIC/ CHARACTER MODE FAULTY PROMPT/CURSOR OPERATION DATA DISPLAY COLOUR INCORRECT NO PAGING OR SCROLL MODE OTHER DATA DISPLAY PROBLEM 830 POOR PRINT QUALITY 831 832 833 834 835 836 83X SNOWY PICTURE DOT NOISE OR DROPOUT ON PICTURE NOISE BARS ON PICTURE BLANKING LINES ON PICTURE BEATING O PICTURE GHOSTING ON PICTURE VCR HEAD SWITCHING NOISE ON PICTURE OVERMODULATION NOISE OTHER PICTURE NOISE PROBLEM 250 UNSTABLE RECEPTION/ TRANSMISSION RECORDING & PHYSICAL PROBLEMS 374 375 376 377 378 379 37A 37B 37X EDITING PROBLEM FAULTY FADING/WIPER OPERATION FAULTY NEGATIVE/POSITIVE SWITCHING FUNCTION FAULTY SUPERIMPOSE/TELOP OPERATION FAULTY PICTURE IN PICTURE/DIGITAL PICTURE OPERATION FAULTY PICTURE TRANSMISSION FAULTY DIGITAL SHUTTER FUNCTION FAULTY GENLOCK FUNCTION FAULTY FLASH/STROBE FUNCTION FAULTY DIGITAL PICTURE FUNCTION FAULTY AUTO-EDIT FUNCTION OTHER SPECIAL PICTURE FUNCTION PROBLEM 470 SPECIAL COLOUR FUNCTION PROBLEM 471 472 47X FAULTY FADE OPERATION FAULTY ECHO OPERATION FAULTY MIXING OPERATION FAULTY REPEAT MODE OPERATION FAULTY AUDIO PROCESSING FAULTY SYNC RECORDING OPERATION FAULTY DBB/DOL OPERATION FAULTY NOISE REDUCTION OPERATION OTHER SPECIAL AUDIO FUNCTION PROBLEM 670 MECHANICAL OPERATION PROBLEM 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 67A 67X FAULTY START/STOP OPERATION FAULTY PAUSE OPERATION FAULTY AUTOMATIC PROGRAM SEARCH FAULTY CUE/REVIEW MODE FAULTY SLOW MOTION OPERATION FAULTY HIGH-SPEED SCANNING MODE FAULTY SPEED COPY FUNCTION FAULTY REPEAT OPERATION FAULTY RECORD REVIEW MODE FAULTY AMS OPERATION OTHER MECHANICAL OPERATION PROBLEM 770 SPECIAL DATA PROCESSING 771 772 773 77X 870 TEST AND CHECK GENERAL OVERHAUL SYSTEM/FREQUENCY CONVERSION INITIAL SETUP REQUESTED MODIFICATION/CIRCUIT CHANGE WRONG SET IN CARTON OTHER SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS SYMPTOM NOT AVAILABLE 280 SPECIAL RECEPTION PROBLEM 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 28X FAULTY STEREO RECEPTION FAULTY MAIN CHANNEL (A) FUNCTION FAULTY SUB-CHANNEL (B) FUNCTION FAULTY SSB RECEPTION FAULTY RDS/VPS OPERATION FAULTY TELETEXT RECEPTION FAULTY SATELLITE/RTTY RECEPTION FAULTY FAX OPERATION OTHER SPECIAL RECEPTION PROBLEM 380 PICTURE DISPLAY/PICKUP PROBLEM 381 382 383 384 385 38X BURN MARK ON DISPLAY/PICKUP SCRATCH ON DISPLAY/PICKUP DUST/DIRT ON DISPLAY/PICKUP PHOSPHOR/PIXEL MISSING ON DISPLAY/PICKUP BRIGHT POINT(S) IN PHOSPHOR/PIXEL OTHER PICTURE DISPLAY/PICKUP PROBLEM 480 FAULTY AUTOMATIC WHITE BALANCE FAULTY COLOUR EFFECTS FUNCTION OTHER SPECIAL COLOUR FUNCTION PROBLEM 570 POOR SPECIAL AUDIO FUNCTION 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 57X 181 182 183 184 185 186 18X 18Z 580 STEREO/MULTI MODE OPERATION PROBLEM 581 582 583 584 585 58X NO STEREO OPERATION POOR CHANNEL SEPARATION DIFFERENCE IN PHASE BETWEEN CHANNELS PROBLEM WITH SURROUND SOUND MODE PROBLEM WITH PCM AUDIO MODE OTHER STEREO/MULTI MODE PROBLEM 680 LENS PROBLEM 681 682 683 684 68X FOCUS PROBLEM ZOOM PROBLEM IRIS PROBLEM MACRO PROBLEM OTHER LENS PROBLEM 780 FAULTY SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE FAULTY WORD PROCESSING FUNCTION FAULTY GRAPHIC EDIT FUNCTION OTHER 'SPECIAL DATA FUNCTION' PROBLEM 880 FAULTY FONT/CHARACTER FUNCTIONS 881 882 883 88X INCORRECT CHARACTERS INCORRECT CHARACTER SIZE FONT LOADING PROBLEM OTHER FAULTY FONT/CHARACTER FUNCTION PROBLEM SECTION CODES ANTENNA SECTION HDD HARD DISC DRIVE RFU BOOSTER/RF UNIT APA AUDIO PROCESSING/ANALOG HFS HIGH FREQUENCY SECTION (RF) RHD ROTARY HEAD(S) APD AUDIO PROCESSING/DIGITAL HOL CASSETTE HOLDER SFT SOFTWARE (TAPE, DISC, ETC.) APR SIGNAL PROCESSING (ANALOG) IDS INFORMATION DISPLAY SECTION SHD STATIONARY HEAD(S) ARM ARM MECHANISM IFC IF-CIRCUIT SLD SLED MECHANISM BCH BATTERY CHARGE IMG IMAGE DISPLAY UNIT SNS SENSOR UNIT BZL BEZEL INC INTERNAL CONNECTOR SPK SPEAKER CBT CABINET INP SIGNAL INPUT SECTION SRS SUPPLY REEL SECTION CHA CHASSIS KBD KEYBOARD (SEPARATE) STA STATIC BLOCK CLK CLOCK/TIMER SECTION LDG LOADING MECHANISM SVO SERVO SECTION CPA COLOUR PROCESSING/ANALOG LNM LENS MECHANISM SYS SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION CPD COLOUR PROCESSING/DIGITAL MEM MEMORY CIRCUIT TDM TAPE DRIVE MECHANISM CRT PICTURE TUBE MIC MICROPHONE SECTION THR THREADING MECHANISM CTR CONTROL PANEL OUT SIGNAL OUTPUT SECTION TIM TIMER SECTION DDM DISC DRIVE MECHANISM PFM PAPER FEED MECHANISM TNR TENSION REGULATOR DFL DEFLECTION CIRCUIT PIN PINCH ROLLER/LEVER TPT TAPE PATH DPR SIGNAL PROCESSING (DIGITAL) PRG PROGRAMMING SECTION TRS TAKE-UP REEL SECTION ERA ERASE CIRCUIT PRI PRINT BLOCK TUN TUNING SECTION EXC EXTERNAL CONNECTOR PRT PROTECTION CIRCUIT TXT TEXT PROCESSING FDD FLOPPY DISC DRIVE PSU POWER SUPPLY VPA VIDEO PROCESSING/ANALOG FLX FLEXIBLE PCB PUD PICK-UP DEVICE VPD VIDEO PROCESSING/DIGITAL FMW FIRMWARE PWA POWER AMP SECTION VWF VIEWFINDER FPK FOCUS PACK REM REMOTE CONTROL SECTION WIR LEAD WIRE HCM HEAD CARRIAGE MECHANISM RFM RIBBON FEED MECHANISM XXX CABINET/COSMETIC PARTS DEFECT CODES MECHANICAL REPAIR CODES ELECTRICAL A REPLACEMENT N MAINTENANCE B MECHANICAL ALIGNMENT O REFURBISHING C ELECTRICAL ALIGNMENT P PREVENTIVE PARTS REPLACEMENT D E RESOLDERING Q PREVENTIVE ACTION WITHOUT PARTS REPLACEMENT CLEANING U EXPLANATION FOR CUSTOMER OPEN F LUBRICATION V ESTIMATION REFUSED S LEAKING REPAIRED ELECTRICAL PARTS W ESTIMATION WITH PARTS SCRATCHED T BAD CONTACT, CONNECTION G H REPAIRED MECHANICAL PARTS X ESTIMATION WITHOUT PARTS H CRACKED, PEELED, CORRODED U OPEN PATTERN I S/B MODIFICATION A WORN OUT N EXHAUSTED, LOW EMISSION B DIRTY, CLOGGED O BURNT, ARCING, MISSING PIXELS C MISALIGNED P MISALIGNED D CUT, BROKEN Q SHORT E DEFORMED R F SNAPPED G I LOOSE V CRACKED PCB J SHAKY, UNSTABLE W COLD OR NO SOLDERING K LEAKING X BRIDGED SOLDERING L DRY (NO LUBRICANT) Y WRONG COMPONENT M FOREIGN OBJECT Z MISSING COMPONENT 1 SOFTWARE BUG J REMOVED COMPONENT (S) K ADDED COMPONENTS Y RETURN WITHOUT REPAIR L FUNCTIONAL CHECK Z SET EXCHANGE M SPECIFICATION MEASUREMENT FLAG SYMPTOM CODE PART NO REF. NO SECTION/PCB REPAIR CODE FLAG: INDICATES THE ONE MAJOR SYMPTOM/PART COMBINATION BY '1' DEFECT CODE www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr ANT QTY 1 . 1 4 1 2 3 6 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 X X R 1 2 3 . 1 1 1 . . Y A 2 2 . T D M . . R C A B 1 0 EXAMPLE OF USE : REV01 S-795-020-10 POWER SUPPLY - ALIMENTATION - NETZTEIL - ALIMENTAZIONE - ALIMENTACIÓN RP20 470R0 19 RP21 RP22 1K0 220R0 DP 1N4001GP 275V~ CP24 4U7 50V DP21 BZX85C39 43(40) TP21 BF423 5,4(3,4) CP22 100N0 5460702500 CP20 220P0 7 1 RP23 100K0 CP23 CP26 100U0 25V DP22 BZX55C5V6 150P0 DP20 BZX55C51 DP24 LL4148 PGND PGND PGND 100K0 VPGND RP27 100K0 8 RP30 6 470K0 5 IN- IN+ CP03 4N7 RP05 RP31 270K0 RP38 1K0 PGND T 03 DP 01 DP RP03 10R0 1N5 02 DP 04 CP10 220U0 400V GP30M PGND CP04 4N7 1 A2 TP15 BTB06-600C G TP14 153(160) BC547B A1 LP82 RP07 5R0 RP14 1K0 RP12 270R0 DP12 RGP10G RP10 2R2 JL82 3 JL81 4 JL80 7 DP50 RGP02-20 - -1,1(0,1) 0,2(0) CP01 100N0 DL81 BZX55C15 FP01 T 2.5 AL BZX55C27 47U0 1 PL80 47K0 TL82 BC337-40 EFC.17000.00 (TUBE 16/9) DL82 1N4148 2 CL83 100N0 RP49 470MI0 2W5 AC MAINS BL81 2 1 EFCcoil 100R0 DP48 RGP10G CP47 100N0 BP01 Mainsvoltage (180V-260V) RL86 270R0 1 RP40 5 CP43 1N0 DP42 LL4148 RL87 270R0 TL83 BC327-40 PGND BL82 2 1 PGND HEARTH FIELD CONNECTION COIL 8(0) +8V +200V LP80 - DP80 BYW76 2 Format 4:3 4:3 4:3 4:3 4:3 4:3 4:3 16:9 16:9 16:9 Usys 126V 132V 132V 126V 126V 126V 126V 138V 138V 138V Jumper JL80 JL81 JL81 JL80 JL80 JL80 JL80 JL82 JL82 JL82 RL65 4k7 24k 24k 4k7 4k7 4k7 4k7 47k 47k 47k +33V RP80 10K0 RP79 22K0 6,9 (0) DP46 RGP10G PGND CP52 1U0 100V DP52 LL4148 USYS CP80 100U0 200V +12v DP93 MUR120 LP93 19 U_TIMER RP91 33K0 -2,2 (0) CP93 470U0 16V CP94 330P0 5 RP52 100R0 PGND DP89 LL4148 9 LP84 RP93 5(0) 10K0 EFC BP85 TP90 BC847B +UA 1 2 BL80 CP89 470N0 +UA (A) -UA DP84 MUR120 DP54 LL4148 CP84 1MI0 50V RP54 470R0 18 RP84 1K0 8 IP87 MC7812/CT 33 (0) 1 3 - 0W25 CP54 4U7 RP44 820R0 0W25 CP92 10N0 DP53 1N4148 RP92 1R0 DP94 BZX55C13 PGND 2,7(2,6) CP56 100N0 3,2(0) PGND 0,5(0,7) TP59 BC847B CP87 10U0 5 (0) DP83 BAT42 CP96 470U0 16V 12 (0) CP58 22U0 50V DP59 BZX55C18 3,2 (0,2) DP56 LL4148 0,1(0,7) RP09 220R0 PGND 2 PGND 1 RP56 10K0 DP57 LL4148 RP57 10R0 CP57 150P0 RP28 100R0 PGND CP59 1N5 PGND DIS IP95 TDA8139 8 HEAT-GND 7 5 +5V +5VDST RP87 +5V 10K0 +5VON POWER_FAIL (A,UP) +5VUP RP96 1K0 +5V (UP) RESET- 3 3 RP97 2K74 4,9 (0,2) 6 RESET 2,5 (0) CP97 10U0 5 (0) DP85 LL4148 9 - 4 TP86 BC857B CP86 10N0 0 (0) 5 (0,2) RP94 1K0 PGND (2,6) RP58 1K0 RP83 2K2 TP58 BC847B DP58 LL4148 RP86 100R0 - 17(0) RP98 1K0 RP59 1K0 RP39 100R0 0W25 12,2 (0) DP87 RGP02-20 2 RP85 2K7 0W43 - TP57 BCR191 +33v - PGND RP55 6K8 DP45 RGP02-20 RP90 10K0 RP89 100R0 CP85 330P0 17 0W25 RP19 1K0 0W25 PGND TP44 2SA1020-Y DP44 -1,02 (0,2) BZX55C3V9 DP47 RGP10G +33V - CP42 - DP43 RGP02-20 PGND +8V 330P0 RP43 6K8 PGND ! CP41 10N0 RP53 5K6 PGND DL83 1N4148 RP42 6K8 6,7(0) RP46 1K5 RL82 150R0 CL80 7,2 (0) LP44 3 100R0 1 VI2 - 1 CP49 2N2 1K6V 1 DL80 TL80 BC337-40 297(316) TP50 ON4977(BU2525AX) LP01 RP48 - RL83 1K0 CL82 1MI0 RL85 5K6 RL80 22R0 4 6 TL81 BC327-40 RL81 1K0 CP44 2N2 15VPP T=12µs RL84 470R0 TP42 BC857B RP45 10K0 1000VPP T=12µs 3 ICC17 CP81 1N0 VO2 7,2 (0) 0W7 BL80 1 UA 2 TP76 BC847B 2,8 (0) CP95 1N0 DP41 RGP10G RP02 1M0 +5VON RP75 150K0 14 CP13 470U0 16V RP11 470R0 +5V TP82 BCR191 5 DP14 BZX55B3V3 150(159) 13 BP85 RP81 1K0 U_VIDEO CP12 100P0 RP13 15R0 RP72 3K3 Tube A51EFS83X191 A59EHJ43X15 A66EHJ43X15 A59EGD048X30 A68EGD038X30 A68AGA25X01 A80AEJ15X01 W56EGV023X015 W66EGV023X015 W76EGV023X015 RL65 * 0W25 16 149(160) RP08 100R0 To DEGAUSSING-COIL RP77 10K0 RP82 1K2 MUR160 DP82 21 P CP15 68N0 0(0) RP74 2K2 PGND P 2 RP70 4K7 RP63 432K0 0W25 RP64 8K25 CP82 22U0 350V RP15 9R0 1 DP70 LL4148 TP75 BCR191 12(0) - 2 BP15 +12V U_TIMER CP83 100P0 6 CP11 10N0 400V STBY_ON RP73 470K0 TP71 BC847B 12(0) PP64 1K0 15 +5VUP 0(0) 0,7(0) LP50 297 +5VUP RP71 10R0 CP69 220U0 25V DP72 BZX55C5V1 -UA -- GP30M 0(0,7) RP68 100R0 CP66 470U0 16V DP66 LL4148 0(07) RP69 33K0 TP67 BC847B TP72 DTC113ZK TL431ACZ RP88 0 0W7 RP01 470K0 GNDA DP Part of board connected to mains supply. Partie du châssis reliée au secteur. Primärseite des Netzteils. Parte dello châssis collegata alla rete. Parte del chassis conectar a la red. CP72 10U0 CP73 10U0 RP62 475R0 RP50 10M0 RP06 470K0 CP38 100N0 DP40 LL4148 IP61 TL431ACZ 4kV PGND RP65 10K0 PGND RP95 100R0 GP30M CP05 CP50 1N0 RP16 470K0 845.0 v RP78 470K0 CP61 100P0 2 CP51 150P0 RP18 470K0 PGND RP41 470R0 V4 RP61 1M0 K PGND RP17 470K0 DP67 LL4148 A E 3 OUT 7 5,7(0) + DP60 LL4148 U_STBY 6,8(7,1) 0W25 RP60 2K2 1 C IP50 TLP621 IP20 2(1,2) ERZV14D511 5VPP-H RP35 470K0 6 1,3(3) V+ DP61 LL4148 CP63 100U0 25V RP66 1K0 9,3(0) 4 3(1,9) PGND 5,5 DP63 LL4148 3 5,5(3,4) IP20 8 V+ TS3702CD OUT 1 4,1(2,5) + RP25 4 3 100K0 PGND 2,7(1,7) 2 INRP26 3 IN+ DP62 LL4148 5 RP24 27K0 U_STBY RP76 270R0 LP20 4 VO1 16 DP 1N4001GP GP30M (PP)17900 MAIN 42 (39,7) 0W25 VI1 PGND CP16 470N0 PROG DP 17 DP Note : During measurements in the power supply unit - Use the primary power unit ground ( PGND ). Attention : Mesure dans le bloc alimentation - Utiliser la masse du bloc alimentation ( PGND ). Achtung : Bei Messungen im Primärnetzteil - Primärnetzteilmasse verwenden ( PGND ). Attenzione : misure nell'alimentatore primario - usare massa alimentazione primario ( PGND ). Cuidado : Medida en el bloque de alimentacion - Utilizar la masa del bloque de alimentacion ( PGND ). 1N4001GP 18 1N4001GP CP17 470N0 275V~ GND DELAY (5) : standby RP99 1K21 +8(0) +8V CP98 470N0 (UP) PO Use isolating mains transformer - Utiliser un transformateur isolateur du secteur -Einen Trenntrafo verwenden Utilizar un transformador aislador de red - Utilizzare un trasformatore per isolarvi dalla rete ICC17 First issue 07 / 98 GNDF EHT 9 CF03 220N0 RL05 * FOCUS RL02 * GNDF 49 CF10 10N0 RF06 * 7,9 + - CF08 220N0 (DP17169.00) LL31 (OS) RL35 4R7 0W5 DL31 BAV21 TL32 BC337-40 6,3 CL33 100P0 TL31 BC847B 0,4 RL33 2K2 GNDL GNDL 1 (OS) RL42 100R0 LL33 TL34 BUH516TH16 RL26 1K0 6 LL32 2 GNDL 0,5 RL25 6K8 0,6 RL40 1K0 RL41 220R0 GNDL GNDL GNDL T = 20ms LFB PO U_VIDEO (uP,OS) (P) (uP) CL11 100U0 RL12 100K0 GNDF RL70 5K6 GNDL CL24 * DL25 RGP10G CL51 * DL51 RGP10M LL22 * CL22 * DL24 RGP10G TL51 SH2G41 GNDL GNDL DP.17169.00 DL22 BYW76 RL51 1K0 RL76 4K7 RL52 18K0 RL71 13K0 DL72 1N4148 RL72 24K0 DL73 LL4148 RL73 12K0 DL74 1N4148 (DP) MAIN .17043.00 1100Vpp-H CL52 22N0 RL55 220K0 CL55 330P0 Indicates critical safety components, and identical components should be used for replacement. Only then can the operational safety be garanteed. Le remplacement des éléments de sécurité (repérés avec le symbole ) par des composants non homologués selon la Norme CEI 65 entraine la nonconformité de l'appareil. Dans ce cas, la responsabilité du fabricant n'est plus engagée. Wenn Sicherheitsteile (mit dem Symbol gekennzeichnet) durch nicht normgerechte Teile ersetzt werden, erlischt die Haftung des Herstellers. La sostituzione degli elementi di sicurezza (contrassegnati con il segno componenti non omologati secondo la norma CEI 65 comporta la non conformitá dell'apparecchio. In tal caso é “esclusa la responsabilità” del costruttore. La subtitución de elementos de seguridad (marcados con el simbolo componentes no homologados segun la norma CEI 65, provoca la no conformidad del aparato. En ese caso, el fabricante cesa de ser responsable. ) con ) por TV PSD CT 17062 26 16N2F +3.5% -3.5% 1K6V 30N0F +5% -5% 400.0V 560N0F +5% -5% 250.0V 100P0F +10% -10% 50.0V 10N0F +10% 63.0V D-SLP BAV103 200.0V D-ZENER BZX55C30 30V 500MI0W WIREBARE 22 0 OHM +0% 100MI0W LF 32U0H +4% -4% TF-DST TDS29 TBD 11 LF 650U0H +5% -5% R 2873 A0 00 LL 26U5H +10% 1R21 OHM +1% 700MI0W 10R0 OHM +1% 100MI0W 6K04 OHM +1% 100MI0W 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0W 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0W 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0W 6K81 OHM +1% 100MI0W 13K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W 150K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W 76K8 OHM +1% 100MI0W 560K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W RCF 4K7 OHM +5% 250MI0W RMF 23K7 OHM +1% 250MI0W 0 0,7 +5VON (OS,A) (OS) BCL DL75 1N4148 (P) +8V (OS) SAFETY 0,1 GNDT GNDT P_SWITCH RL57 1K0 DP.17169.00 10515550 GNDL TV ASY A59EGD048X30 19 TV ASY A68EGD038X30 (A) 68 00 Tube 4/3 21" OT 10555770 CL21 CL22 CL24 CL41 DL71 JL60 JL80 LB02 LL05 LL22 LL26 RF05 RF06 RL02 RL03 RL04 RL05 RL06 RL45 RL49 RL65 RV20 15,7 VSUPPLY TL71 BC847C TL72 RN1401 TV ASY A51EFS83X191 03 Tube 4/3 33" , MP 10575830 CL21 CL22 CL24 CL41 CL48 DL48 DL71 JL60 JL80 LB02 LL05 LL22 LL26 RF05 RF06 RL02 RL03 RL04 RL05 RL06 RL19 RL45 RL48 RL49 RL65 RV20 GNDL CL71 1N0 GNDL RL56 1K0 GNDL VRETRACE 49 RL77 27K0 RL74 10K0 TL55 BF422 # see in CRT 17xxx xx partlist * see in CT 17xxx xx partlist 12Vpp-V GNDF RL75 680R0 DL77 LL4148 CL72 100U0 TUBE 16/9 GNDL DL71 * RL54 10K0 TL52 BF423 TV ASY A80AEJ15X01 (A) 00 First issue 07 / 98 P GNDF CL53 100N0 1 1Vpp-V ICC17 49 VRETRACE +8V GNDL CL42 2U7 TL41 BD241C +5VDST RL11 4R7 ZL11 500MI0 RL53 18K0 CL25 1U0 DL21 BY228 RL24 6K8 4 RL44 2R2 TL42 BC546B +5VON CL16 470U0 GNDL BL01 10095060 1,2 (P) +5VUP DL12 1N4148 1 15Vpp-H 16,1 RL43 68K1 GNDL DL11 RGP10M DP1769.00 1 RL37 22R0 0W25 0 13Vpp-H DL42 ZMM5.1 DL19 LL4148 H-YOKE LL26 * 0 GNDL EW GNDL CL14 470U0 4 3 CL38 220U0 16V GNDL GNDL 15,7 VSUPPLY 5 TL14 2SC2236Y 7 CL21 * 6,1 6,3 TL33 MPS750 RL49 * CL41 * 100P0 12Vpp-V CL37 10U0 DL33 1N4148 10518110 DL48 * RL48 * DL14 RGP15G LL33 6,5 GNDL 1K0 5,6 RL10 47R0 RL36 2R2 0 1,2Vpp-H BAV103 CL48 * 6 GNDL GNDL 5 DL32 1N4148 6,3 RL19 * 330P0 BCL DL09 BZX55C5V1 DP1769.00 RL15 5,7 RL16 GNDL GNDF 11,5 RL34 1K8 CL31 22P0 ZL14 500MI0 GNDL RL39 2K2 RL32 1K0 EHT2 O(B) +V DL13 RGP30D RL18 10K0 5 2,3 + CL36 4N7 GNDL CL39 1N0 2,3 2 +V 2 RL31 3K3 HDRIVE + S+I + 1 2 CL32 470U0 16V GNDL P ZL13 630MI0 (OS) CL09 10U0 4U7 CL08 10N0 * 1 6 1 4 7,8 RL07 6K19 CL13 1MI0 TV PSD CT 17035 26 8N3F +3.5% -3.5% 1K6V 33N0F +5% -5% 1K0V 440N0F +5% -5% 250.0V 1N0F +10% -10% 50.0V D-ZENER BZX55C24 24V 500MI0W WIREBARE 22 0 OHM +0% 100MI0W LF 18U0H +7% -7% TF-DST M30FBC3 10555640 3087 A0 LF 650U0H +5% -5% R 2873 A0 00 LL 85U0H 2519 A0 1R5 OHM +1% 700MI0W 10R0 OHM +1% 100MI0W 6K04 OHM +1% 100MI0W 10K0 OHM +1% 100MI0W 10K0 OHM +1% 100MI0W 10K0 OHM +1% 100MI0W 3K32 OHM +1% 100MI0W 110K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W 60K4 OHM +1% 100MI0W 4K7 OHM +5% 250MI0W 23K7 OHM +1% 250MI0W 5Vpp-H Tube 4/3 25" SF, 29" SF 10515520 CL21 CL22 CL24 CL41 CL48 DL48 DL71 JL60 JL80 LB02 LL05 LL22 LL26 RF05 RL02 RL03 RL04 RL05 RL06 RL19 RL45 RL48 RL49 RL65 RV20 TV ASY A59EHJ43X15 00 TV ASY A66EHJ43X15 00 Tube 4/3 25", 28" , MP /Vectorgun EHT2 RL09 6K8 47K0 DEV CL15 DEV U_TIMER (P) GNDF RL13 470MI0 RL46 12K0 GNDL P T -I P+V RL45 * # RB10 LL13 GNDL U_DRIVER 3 S-I T +I 9 (OS) EHT 1 1 GNDL CL12 330P0 11 4 + + 7,8 GNDL BB03 GNDL 8 P+V IF01 TDA8351 O(A) +V GNDF 2V 3 CURRENT SOURCE P+V 7 DF01 BZW04-48 RF08 33R0 50Vpp-V 8 G2 GNDL V RF07 220R0 1 BF01B + - 2 GNDL 2 1 15,7 10 RF05 * BF01 BF01A 6 GNDL 3 0,1 CL59 470N0 5Vpp-V RL47 33K0 GNDF 3 RF04 * 0 CRT CF04 22N0 RF09 (OS) DP1769.00 VRETRACE VGUARD RL06 * 4 CRT GNDF GNDF 5 0 (P) +8V 7 to CRT-Bord GNDF TL02 BF422 BL02 6 RL58 RL59 4K7 10K0 0,8 TL59 BC857B 0,3 0,8 RL04 * 10500980 BB02 7 GNDL LL05 * (uP) FORMAT/BC RL03 * JL60 * CF01 1N0 (P) U_TIMER USYS +V (OS) CF02 1N0 2V 0,9Vpp-F 0 RF03 100R0 T = 64µs T = 20ms HEAT_2 RF13 39K0 RF02 3K01 RL01 45K3 HEAT_1 VSUPPLY CF11 1N0 CF12 100P0 RF12 68K0 TF01 BC847B RF01 100R0 (P) RF11 3K9 VFLB (uP) (OS) -V +5VON (OS,A) SCANNING - BALAYAGE - ABLENKUNG - BARRIDO - SCANSIONE TV PSD CT 17071 26 16N2F +3.5% -3.5% 1K6V 30N0F +5% -5% 400.0V 510N0F +5% -5% 250.0V 100P0F +10% -10% 50.0V 10N0F +10% 63.0V D-SLP BAV103 200.0V D-ZENER BZX55C30 30V 500MI0W WIREBARE 22 0 OHM +0% 100MI0W LF 32U0H +4% -4% TF-DST TDS29 TBD 13 LF 650U0H +5% -5% LL 26U5H +10% RMF 1R0 OHM +1% 700MI0W 6K8 OHM +5% 100MI0W 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0W 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0W 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0W 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0W 15K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W 180K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W 100K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W 300K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W 4K7 OHM +5% 250MI0W 33K2 OHM +1% 250MI0W 10518330 TV PSD CT 17061 32 CL21 14N0F +3.5% -3.5% 1K5V CL22 30N0F +5% -5% 400.0V CL24 470N0F +5% -5% 250.0V CL24 440N0F +5% -5% 250.0V CL41 100P0F +10% -10% 50.0V CL48 CPM 10N0F +10% 63.0V DL48 D-SLP BAV103 200.0V DL71 D-ZENER BZX55C30 30V 500MI0W JL60 WIREBARE 22 JL81 0 OHM +0% 100MI0W JP80 0 OHM +0% 100MI0W LB02 LF 18U0H +7% -7% LL05 TF-DST M30FBC3 10546610 3087 A0 LL22 LF 650U0H +5% -5% R 2873 A0 00 LL26 LL 26U5H +10% LL26 LL 30U5H 2519 A0 RF04 1R21 OHM +1% 700MI0W RF05 1R0 OHM +1% 700MI0W RF05 1R21 OHM +1% 700MI0W RF06 12R1 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL02 10K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W RL02 6K04 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL02 499R0 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL03 10K0 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL03 11K5 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL04 10K0 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL04 20K0 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL04 11K5 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL05 10K0 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL05 20K0 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL05 11K5 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL06 4K75 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL06 11K5 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL11 4R7 OHM +10% 250MI0W RL11 4R7 OHM +5% 250MI0W RL19 22K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W RL19 33K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W RL43 68K1 OHM +1% 250MI0W RL43 68K1 OHM +1% 250MI0W RL43 68K1 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL45 180K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W RL45 270K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W RL46 12K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W RL47 33K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W RL48 76K8 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL48 60K4 OHM +1% 100MI0W RL64 8K25 OHM +1% 100MI0W RCF 24K0 OHM +5% 250MI0W RL65 RV20 RMF 33K2 OHM +1% 250MI0W RV20 33K2 OHM +1% 100MI0W ZL13 PROTEC MOD MP63 630MI0 A 65.0V TV ASY W56EGV023X015 56 01 TV ASY W66EGV023X015 66 00 TV ASY W76EGV023X015 (A) 00 Tube 16/9 24", 28",32", SF / vectorgun 10515530 CL21 CL22 CL24 CL41 CL48 CL51 DL48 DL71 JL60 JL82 LB02 LL05 LL22 LL26 RF05 RL02 RL03 RL04 RL05 RL06 RL19 RL45 RL48 RL49 RL65 RV20 TV PSD CT 17083 38 15N5F +3.5% -3.5% 1K6V 27N0F +5% -5% 400.0V 440N0F +5% -5% 250.0V 100P0F +10% -10% 50.0V 100N0F +5% 63.0V 290N0F +5% -5% 250.0V D-SLP BAV103 200.0V D-ZENER BZX55C24 24V 500MI0W WIREBARE 22 0 OHM +0% 100MI0W LF 32U0H +4% -4% TF-DST TDS29 15314460 10 LF 650U0H +5% -5% LL 30U5H 2519 A0 1R21 OHM +1% 700MI0W 4K99 OHM +1% 100MI0W 6K49 OHM +1% 100MI0W 6K49 OHM +1% 100MI0W 6K49 OHM +1% 100MI0W 2K37 OHM +1% 100MI0W 13K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W 390K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W 220K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W 180K0 OHM +5% 100MI0W 47K0 OHM +5% 250MI0W 100K0 OHM +1% 250MI0W ADDR7 ADDR6 ADDR5 ADDR4 ADDR3 ADDR2 ADDR1 ADDR0 DAT0 DAT1 DAT2 DAT7 DAT6 DAT5 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 DAT3 ADDR12 79 DAT4 ADDR15 80 CONTROL MICROPROCESSOR - MICROPROCESSEUR DE COMMANDE - MIKROPROZESSOR - MICROPROCESSORE DEI COMANDI - MICROPROCESADOR DE LOS MANDOS 2 5V_VCC 39K0 23 RR04 39K0 24 +5V_STBY DR20 1N4148 5V_VCC DR24 LL4148 RR20 10K0 RR22 1K0 CR09 47P0 CR08 47P0 CR07 47P0 CR06 47P0 DR21 LL4148 CR05 47P0 100R0 RR21 22K0 0,3 =TV 0,15 = Stdby RR40 CR22 10N0 CR24 1N0 25 RR08 39K0 +5V_STBY TR20 DTC113ZK CR21 10N0 0,7 = TV 0 = Stdby 5V_VCC LR10 10U0 RR49 10K0 RR87 2K2 First issue 07 / 98 CR97 22P0 55 CR94 1N0 54 RR94 53 RR93 5K6 52 CR92 22P0 CR11 100N0 CR10 47U0 RR32 3K3 4,8 = TV 0 = Mute RR30 220R0 (P) CR93 4N7 GNDA CR90 220P0 CR91 220N0 GNDA RR81 10K0 RR80 1K0 48 RR78 1K0 (DP) VFLB 47 RR76 560R0 (OS) R_OSD 46 RR74 560R0 (OS) G_OSD 45 RR72 560R0 (OS) B_OSD 44 RR70 150R0 (OS) FB_OSD 43 RR63 1K0 (DP) BCC 42 RR62 10K0 (OS) TRAP_INFO 41 RR66 100R0 GNDA 49 RR82 6K8 5K6 (A) (DP) (DP) RR64 4K7 RR58 10K0 RR71 1K5 RR73 1K5 RR75 1K5 5V_VCC RR69 10K0 RR56 10K0 LFB FORMAT RR77 1K5 GNDA (OS) AV3_PORT RR57 1K0 RR55 100R0 RR68 100R0 RR50 10K0 (OS) AVS1 RR51 10K0 (OS) (P) AVS2 PO (P) RESET- RR53 6K8 VDDA TR60 BC847B DR23 1N4148 0 5V_VCC RR60 33K0 RR52 6K8 GNDA CR20 100N0 5V_VCC 0,2 = Stdby (P) STBY_ON CR23 1N0 0 = Stdby TR23 BCR141 GNDP CR30 100N0 MAIN (RP) (RP) .17000.00 .17001.00 CR32 100P0 CR33 100P0 RESET- GNDA * RESET_MSP- 4,8 = TV 0 = Mute GNDA GNDA 6K8 RR31 220R0 BR08 TR40 BCR141 5V_VCC CVBSTXT RR90 RR10 1K0 IR03 ST24C08M U_STBY GNDA 1K0 RR91 +8V +5VUP 50 10U0 CR41 1N0 MUTE- (A) POWER_FAIL 4N7 56 LR20 RR33 3K3 (P) STBY_ON ICC17 2N2 CR95 +5VUP (P) RR86 470R0 CR96 5K6 1 0 = TV 0 = Mute 15K0 RR95 51 5V_VCC RR44 * DR22 LL4148 RR96 57 58 Po-Port RR46 10K0 VDDA 82P0 VDDA RR03 5 59 (OS) CR98 VDDA 22 60 E SCL 6 NC MODE/ WC 7 PRE VCC 1 8 21 1K5 GNDA 61 3 1K5 RR02 CR99 470N0 5 RR01 SDA 20 VSS 19 Stby-Port 4 Led-Port 100R0 62 40 100R0 RR17 39 RR12 38 18 37 DR05 LL42 100N0 17 36 RR18 4K7 16 35 RR05 10K0 15 34 RR06 10K0 ADDR13 ADDR14 MMU1 MMU2 SDA (OS,A) RR09 10K0 5V_VCC DR10 BAT42 # SCL (OS,A) +5V_STBY IR01 33 13 32 12 QR01 4M0 31 11 4M0 ADDR15 ADDR12 ADDR7 ADDR6 ADDR5 ADDR4 ADDR3 ADDR2 ADDR1 ADDR0 DAT0 DAT1 DAT2 DAT7 DAT6 DAT5 1 5V_VCC CR04 82P0 100R0 1 9 10 +5VUP (P) U_STBY 6,8 63 RR45 2 9 (P) 64 DAT4 DAT3 GNDA CVBS1 CVBS2 TEST0 CVBSO TXCF JTRSTO MCFM RESET PXFM VDDA WSCF WSCR HSYNC VSYNC R G B FB P4.0/PWM0 P4.1/PWM1 P4.2/PWM2 * 3 CR03 NI CR12 100N0 (OS) 4 DAT7 DAT6 DAT5 DAT4 DAT3 AV_LINK 5 8 14 0 = TV 7,1= Stdby 4,8 = TV 0 = Stdby TR13 BCR141 +8V Q3 17 7 30 FCB IR +5V_STBY CR15 KEYB_A KEYB_B KEY_IN_1 KEY_IN_2 Q5 19 Q4 18 16 GND 6 ADDR8 Format-detect 6 14 Q1 15 Q2 ADDR9 RR48 7 Q7 21 Q6 20 5 29 8 12 A0 13 Q0 4 1K0 U_STBY OE 24 A10 23 CE 22 DSN ADDR11 MMU0 MMU3 ADDR10 DSN ADDR11 ADDR9 ADDR8 R/WN GNDM VDDM OSCIN OSCOUT ADDR13 ADDR14 MMU1 MMU2 MMU4 MMU5 P3.7/CSO/RESETI P3.6/ASN P3.5 P3.4/RWN P5.1/SDI/ SDO/INT1 P5.0/SCK/ INT2 RR43 9 1 RR16 100R0 9 A3 10 A2 11 A1 3 28 BR01 A9 26 A11 25 2 1K0 CR80 1N0 7 A5 8 A4 1 100R0 BK01 RR14 22K0 A13 28 A8 27 MMU0 ADDR10 RR42 GNDP 5 A7 6 A6 MMU2 MMU1 ADDR14 ADDR13 ADDR8 ADDR9 ADDR11 DSN ADDR10 RR41 6,7 = TV 5,3 = Stdby 6 = TV 7,1= Stdby A17 30 A14 29 (P) +8V P2.0/ INT7 P2.3/INT6/VSO1 P2.4/NMI P0.2 P0.1 P0.0 P4.7/PWM7/INT3 P4.6/PWM6 P4.5/PWM5 VDD GND P2.1/INT5/AIN1 P2.2/INT0/AIN2 P2.5/INT4/AIN3/VSO2 P4.4/PWM4 P4.3/ PWM3 TR15 BC857B 3 A15 4 A12 JR51 0 27 6,8 = TV U_STBY 7,1= Stdby RR15 4K7 VCC 32 A18 31 26 MMU0 ADDR15 ADDR12 ADDR7 ADDR6 ADDR5 ADDR4 ADDR3 ADDR2 ADDR1 ADDR0 DAT0 DAT1 DAT2 1 VPP 2 A16 2 CR01 100N0 LR02 IR02 MX27C4000MC-90 RR44 4/3 RR48 16/9 * = value see partlist DP 17... 00 # RP 17000 00 RP 17001 00 IR01 ST92R195 CUT 2.2 JAL (10592030) ST92R195 CUT 2.2 JAM (10588150) 2 4 8 GNDV 9 GNDV RX14 0 10 GNDV 14 15 CX03 13 330P0 11 12 GND1 GNDV RX57 150R0 CX59 10U0 20 21 RX39 75R0 TX45 2,3 BC547B 8 BJ04 GNDV RX58 75R0 BX50 1 GNDV RX47 2K2 RX43 0 GNDV 3 CX47 100N0 GNDV 2 GNDV BX04 6 FCB 1 1 2 3 IN2b CTLb OUTb OUTa CTLa IN2a GND 10 IN1b 9 8 7 6 5 6 +8V (P) CVBSTXT +8V AV2_CVBS_OUT (uP) (P) GNDA LFB HDRIVE (DP) (DP) EW (DP) +8V -V (DP) (P) +V (DP) 1U0 52 53 54 55 56 2N7 CC01 CV20 58 59 61 0 7,9 4 3 3,3 GND1 CI63 10U0 RI65 180R0 DET VP2 CVBS10 DECDIG 3,5 5,5 CV01 4U7 RV03 100R0 RV15 6K8 RI60 1K0 R_SC FB_OSD 38 0 37 3,8 CV12 22N0 36 3,8 CV11 22N0 35 3,8 CV10 22N0 R_OSD 34 3 RV13 1K0 (DP) VGUARD 33 2,5 RV12 8K2 CV09 1N0 GND1 G_OSD (DP) BCL CV08 4U7 GND1 0 RV05 100R0 RV06 100R0 RV07 100R0 LV05 6U8 LV06 6U8 LV07 6U8 0 CV14 1N0 1V 3,5Vpp-H 1V 3,8Vpp-H BV01 1 1 2 CV05 82P0 CI61 4N7 RV01 1R0 B_OSD DV09 LL4148 GND1 +8V 1,8V 3,5Vpp-H 22N0 2,5 RI66 160R0 CC11 1N0 CV15 2,3 GND1 GND1 2 2V 4Vpp-H HOUT RO 3 - FBISO SW02 DECBG 1,2 3,5 LI50 3U3 FI50 5M74 PH2LF GND2 EWD BCLIN CV06 82P0 CV07 82P0 3 GND1 GND1 GND1 GND1 GND1 4 5 6 CRT 6 GND1 CV02 100N0 GND1 4 CV03 100U0 CV04 4U7 GND1 CX19 1N0 GNDAU 0 MAIN 1,5V 3,2Vpp-H SCL (uP) SDA (uP) (A) SIF CHROMA_AV2/AV3 AV2/AV3_Y/CVBS (uP) AV3_PORT AV3_R (A) AV3_L (A) AV2_CVBS_OUT AV1_CVBS_OUT AV1_CVBS_IN B_SC G_SC FB_SC R_SC (A) RI SDA 3 GNDV (A) AV1_OUT_R AV1_IN_R (A) (A) AVS1 (uP) AV1_OUT_L AV1_IN_L (A) (A) AV2_OUT_R AV2_IN_R (A) AV2_OUT_L (A) AV2_IN_L (uP) SDA AVS2 (uP) (uP) SCL RX28 220R0 SCL GND1 GNDV RX27 220R0 RV31 100R0 CX62 10U0 LX62 2U2 19 GI CI60 10N0 1 CRROMA CVBS2_OUT CVBS2_IN 19 18 IFVO G_SC 41 39 BI GND1 RV30 100R0 GND1 CX61 22N0 17 RGBIN PLLF 7,9 RI59 220R0 CI72 22N0 16 4,9 LUMIN IFVC02 CI57 2U2 TI60 BC847B LX59 2U2 AV3 FRONT-CONNECTOR 18 SW01 CI59 1N0 1,8 CHROMA_IN GNDV DX62 BAV103 1,8 2,5 RI63 560R0 RI64 56R0 GNDV 2,5 CX60 22N0 CX58 27P0 2,5 DX59 BAV103 GNDV RX59 100R0 GNDV GNDV 4,9 2,5 16 17 5 VCC 5 CX18 100N0 GNDV RX56 75R0 GNDV RX16 10R0 CX15 10U0 3,4 IFVC01 B_SC 22N0 1,5V 2Vpp-H (OS) 3,8Vpp-H 1,2V +8V .17055.00 * = see CT 17xxx partslist +5VON +5VON (DP) 8 8 CX17 100N0 GNDV RX03 10K0 7 3 15 22N0 CV16 +8V (P) RX13 2K2 RI61 1K0 IX01 BA7604N Y/CVBS/AV3 150R0 GNDV 6 RX19 5 RX24 GNDAU 150R0 RX22 4 150R0 3 IN1a 2,3 GNDV 2 4 1 TX15 BC547B +5VON RX17 10R0 3 BX02 +8V RX18 75R0 2 RX09 75R0 1 RX25 CX02 330P0 150R0 RX23 CVBS1_IN GNDV 150R0 GNDV 21 14 CI56 4,8 10N0 6,8 GNDT GNDT 20 13 2,8 CV17 3 40 LUMOUT NC 20 CVBS1_OUT 19 GND1 18 CH08 100U0 RX08 75R0 GNDV GND1 17 3,8 1 3,8 RI2 QSS0 3 42 TO CRT BOARD RI51 390R0 GND2 12 GI2 SIFAGC FB_SC 0 43 GO 3 44 BI2 Bo 0 11 7 - 5 CI55 100N0 0 2,2 IV01 TDA8855H SIFIN2 BLKIN TI45 DTC144EK RH04 15K0 DH04 1N4148 10 46 45 RGBIN2 SIFIN1 GND1 47 BYO AGCOUT QC02 3M579545 GND1 32 6 9 3,6 RYO 31 3 0 BYI 30 2 8 RYI 2K7 2U2 0 CC07 18P0 48 DECAGC RV08 CI54 7 QC01 4M433619 4M433619 49 IREF CVBSext GND2 2,5 CC06 18P0 50 VCS 29 6 220N0 5 2U2 4 VRDA VDRB 39K2 3,9 CI50 GNDV 16 4 RV25 51 REFO EHTO AV1_CVBS_IN 15 4 FI30 77M8 - GNDT RX07 75R0 (DP) SAFETY XTAL1 SECPLL GNDV 14 RC05 100K0 GND1 IFIN2 AMOUT 1 5 100N0 3,9 O1 4 O2 5 GND 3 CV26 GND2 GNDT 7 13 GND2 2,1 28 4 6 GNDV 12 3 I2 GND1 CC05 100N0 3 XTAL2 AM/AF(A) FI02 31M9 RX06 75R0 11 GND2 3 8 91P0 RX02 10K0 GNDV 10 SDA SCL GND 2 DI40 BA782S CC04 3N3 GND2 27 RI41 2K2 GND2 CC10 CI05 12P0 - GNDV 8 AV1 CI03 12P0 CI09 15P0 RX05 75R0 7 AV2 1 I1 GNDAU GNDV 9 CI53 10N0 FI20 K9650M RI04 82R0 GNDT 2 - GND2 IFIN1 AV1_CVBS_OUT 3 4,6 GND2 3 7 2 4 2 - 1 2 1 GND2 68p 6 4,6 VP1 1 5 FI10 K6257K 5 RI50 680R0 GND2 23 4 FI01 40M4 1 8 10 RI33 2K2 CI04 6P8 GNDT BX01 3 CHROMA RI07 100R0 DI30 BA782S CC02 100N0 TDA8855H CHROMA_AV2/AV3 IF CI10 1N0 GNDT RI32 2K2 8 9 64 GND2 CI02 6P8 6 GND2 GNDT SW01 LI10 470N0 +5VUP RV14 100R0 0,5 2,3 2,3 1,1 6Vpp-H CC03 100U0 GND2 RI58 220R0 CI58 1N0 RC02 1R0 2,8 62 TI30 DTC144EK GNDT GNDT 11 NH01 CTT5010 5 SW02 0 6Vpp-V RV17 15K0 63 GND2 RV18 100R0 CV21 1U0 CV24 1N0 T = 64µs T = 20ms RV10 220R0 3 RV19 4K7 CV22 4N7 RV09 220R0 2,3 57 0 = Secam 5,1 = Pal TI10 DTC144EK - 4 GND2 3,7 = Secam 0 = Pal GNDT IF NC NC 9 10 NC 6 +30V 5 DA 4 CL 2 33,5 +5V NC 3 AS 1 5 GNDT RI31 1K5 CVBS/Y GNDT GNDT AGC DH01 BZX55B33 RI42 1K5 CI45 22N0 22 CH01 100N0 RH05 3K9 21 4 = Secam 0 = Pal CI43 22N0 RV16 22K0 GND2 GND2 CV23 1N0 GND2 GNDT RH10 100R0 GNDT CV27 15P0 CV25 1N0 RI03 4K7 0 = Secam 5 = Pal TV10 BC847B 8 1,5V 1,5Vpp-V PH1LF 0 GNDT CI12 1N0 CH03 470U0 DV19 1N4148 RV20 * CVBS20 0 0 0 0 0 0 X GND1 0 0 0 0 0 0 X CVBSINT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 26 0 0 0 0 0 1 X 25 0 0 0 0 1 1 X 60 1 0 1 0 0 0 X AV2/AV3_Y/CVBS LH10 10U0 0 0 0 0 0 1 X 32.90/32.35 32.40/32.65 32.40/33.05 32.40/33.05 40.40 X GND1 RH02 100R0 CI47 22N0 38.90 38.90 38.90 38.90 38.90 33.90 X 24 B/G I D/K K’ L L' AV +5VON RH03 2K7 (DP) EHT +5VUP Standard picture carrier sound carrier SWO1 SWO2 MOD L’FA VSW IFS STM [MHz] [MHz] (uP) Piece de securite N'utilisez que les pieces d'origine GND2 Safety Part When repairing, use original part only (DP) TRAP_INFO +33V (uP) Sicherheitsbauteil Bei Ersatz nur Originalteil verwenden (P) SCL SDA (uP) RF/FI/ SCART INTERFACE/VIDEO SIGNAL PROCESSING -HF/FI INTERFACE PERITELEVISION/TRAITEMENT LUMINANCE CHROMINANCE - HF/ZF/ SCART INTERFACE/VIDEO SIGNALVERARBEITUNG - RF/FI /PRESA PERITEL/ELABORAZIONE VIDEO - RF/FI /EUROCONECTOR / TRATAMENTO VIDEO ICC17 First issue 07 / 98 CV25 1N0 GND2 +8V GNDA CC02 100N0 GND2 GND2 CC04 3N3 GND2 GND1 1U0 RC05 100K0 GND1 (DP) SAFETY 55 2N7 CV20 CC05 100N0 3 56 57 11 GND2 58 64 2,3 2,3 1,1 CC01 0,5 1,5V 1,5Vpp-V 59 0 LI10 470N0 RV14 100R0 6Vpp-H CC03 100U0 GND2 GNDT GNDT +5VUP IF NC NC 9 10 NC 6 +30V 5 DA 4 CL 2 33,5 RC02 1R0 2,8 TI10 DTC144EK GNDT 5 +5V NC 3 AS 1 GNDT 0 6Vpp-V RV17 15K0 60 GNDT GNDT AGC DH01 BZX55B33 RV18 100R0 CV21 1U0 CV24 1N0 61 CH01 100N0 0 = Secam 5 = Pal CV22 4N7 T = 64µs 52 4 = Secam 0 = Pal RH05 3K9 GND2 GNDT RH10 100R0 GNDT CI43 22N0 RV10 220R0 3 RV19 4K7 GND2 GND2 CV23 1N0 GND2 RI03 4K7 RV09 220R0 2,3 53 GNDT CI12 1N0 CH03 470U0 RV16 22K0 54 LH10 10U0 62 RH02 100R0 63 RH03 2K7 CV27 15P0 CI47 22N0 T = 20ms (uP) TV10 BC847B 8 +5VON (P) CVBSTXT +8V AV2_CVBS_OUT DV19 1N4148 RV20 * (P) LFB HDRIVE (DP) (DP) EW (DP) +8V -V (DP) (P) +V (DP) (DP) EHT +5VUP (uP) Piece de securite N'utilisez que les pieces d'origine (DP) Safety Part When repairing, use original part only TRAP_INFO +33V (uP) Sicherheitsbauteil Bei Ersatz nur Originalteil verwenden (P) SCL SDA (uP) RF/FI/ SCART INTERFACE/VIDEO SIGNAL PROCESSING -HF/FI INTERFACE PERITELEVISION/TRAITEMENT LUMINANCE CHROMINANCE - HF/ZF/ SCART INTERFACE/VIDEO SIGNALVERARBEITUNG - RF/FI /PRESA PERITEL/ELABORAZIONE VIDEO - RF/FI /EUROCONECTOR/TRATAMENTO VIDEO 15 RX57 150R0 20 21 TX45 2,3 BC547B 8 BJ04 GNDV RX58 75R0 BX50 1 GNDV RX47 2K2 RX43 0 GNDV 3 CX47 100N0 GNDV BX04 6 FCB GNDV 2 1 1 2 3 RV30 100R0 6 LI50 RI65 180R0 3U3 3 3,3 CC11 1N0 2 CV01 4U7 CV15 22N0 R_SC FB_OSD 38 0 37 3,8 CV12 22N0 B_OSD 36 3,8 CV11 22N0 G_OSD 35 3,8 CV10 22N0 R_OSD RV13 1K0 (DP) VGUARD 34 3 33 2,5 DV09 LL4148 RV12 8K2 GO Bo BLKIN 3 CV09 1N0 (DP) BCL CV08 4U7 GND1 0 RV05 100R0 RV06 100R0 RV07 100R0 LV05 6U8 LV06 6U8 LV07 6U8 0 CV14 1N0 1 2 CV05 82P0 CV06 82P0 CV07 82P0 3 GND1 GND1 1V 3,5Vpp-H 3,8Vpp-H 1V BV01 GND1 CI61 4N7 RV01 1R0 1,8V 3,5Vpp-H G_SC 41 2,5 RV15 6K8 RI60 1K0 B_SC 22N0 2,3 GND1 RV03 100R0 +8V 22N0 CV16 GND1 3,5 5,5 GND1 CV17 3 32 GND1 3 - DET VP2 CVBS10 DECDIG HOUT FBISO SW02 4 RI66 160R0 GND1 2V 4Vpp-H PH2LF PH1LF GND2 7,9 CI63 10U0 GND1 GND1 GND1 1 4 5 CRT 6 6 GND1 CV02 100N0 CV03 100U0 CV04 4U7 GNDV GND1 4 5 EWD VRDA 1,2 3,5 31 20 GND1 IN1b IN2b CTLb OUTb OUTa CTLa IN2a VCC GND 10 9 8 7 6 5 LX62 2U2 GND1 CX19 1N0 GNDAU 0 SCL (uP) SDA (uP) (A) 1,5V 3,2Vpp-H SIF CHROMA_AV2/AV3 AV2/AV3_Y/CVBS (uP) AV3_PORT AV3_R (A) AV3_L (A) AV2_CVBS_OUT AV1_CVBS_OUT AV1_CVBS_IN B_SC G_SC FB_SC (A) R_SC (A) AV1_OUT_R (A) AV1_IN_R (A) AVS1 (uP) AV1_OUT_L (A) AV1_IN_L (A) AV2_OUT_R (A) AV2_OUT_L AV2_IN_R (A) AV2_IN_L (uP) AVS2 (uP) SDA (uP) SCL RX28 220R0 RV31 100R0 CX62 10U0 GNDV RX27 220R0 RO CI60 10N0 1 CX61 22N0 RX39 75R0 DECBG FI50 5M74 CRROMA CVBS2_OUT CVBS2_IN 19 BCLIN GND1 CI72 22N0 LX59 2U2 AV3 FRONT-CONNECTOR 18 SDA 7,9 1,8 CHROMA_IN GNDV RI 30 GND1 CX59 10U0 SCL FB_SC 3 42 39 GI CI57 2U2 TI60 BC847B DX62 BAV103 1,8 2,5 RI63 560R0 RI64 56R0 IFVO 0 43 40 BI GNDV 2,5 CX60 22N0 CX58 27P0 DX59 BAV103 GNDV RX59 100R0 GNDV 2,5 2,5 16 17 GNDV 4,9 19 44 1,5V 2Vpp-H OS.17056.00 10515740 20.01.98 * = see CT 17xxx partslist 3,8Vpp-H 1,2V +8V +5VON +5VON (DP) GNDV 14 CX03 13 330P0 11 12 GNDV GNDV RX56 75R0 GNDV 5 CX18 100N0 18 RGBIN PLLF 46 TO CRT BOARD 9 GNDV RX14 0 RX16 10R0 CX15 10U0 17 LUMIN IFVC02 GND1 +8V (P) 8 10 8 CX17 100N0 GNDV RX03 10K0 7 3 GND1 RX13 2K2 RI61 1K0 IX01 BA7604N Y/CVBS/AV3 150R0 GNDV 6 RX19 5 RX24 GNDAU 150R0 RX22 4 150R0 3 IN1a 2,3 GNDV 2 4 1 TX15 BC547B +5VON RX17 10R0 3 BX02 +8V RX18 75R0 2 RX09 75R0 1 RX25 CX02 330P0 150R0 RX23 CVBS1_IN GNDV 150R0 GNDV 21 4,9 CI56 4,8 10N0 6,8 GNDT 20 3,4 16 IFVC01 2K7 CVBS1_OUT 19 15 AV1_CVBS_IN 18 CH08 100U0 RX08 75R0 GNDV 14 2,8 RV08 GNDV 17 1 3,8 CVBSext 8 GND1 45 LUMOUT NC 29 4 RI2 220N0 RI51 390R0 GND2 13 QSS0 SECPLL 2 5 CI55 100N0 RH04 15K0 DH04 1N4148 12 3,8 GI2 AMOUT 3 SIFAGC QC02 3M579545 47 BI2 28 7 GNDV 16 4 11 - 6 - GNDT RX07 75R0 15 2,2 IV01 TDA8855H SIFIN2 CC07 18P0 48 RGBIN2 SIFIN1 27 GNDV 14 10 BYO CC10 GNDT 7 13 3 FI30 77M8 9 2U2 3,6 GND2 2 3 CI54 AGCOUT AM/AF(A) 5 JI50 0 GNDT 1 6 GNDV 12 O2 5 GND RYO CVBS20 RX06 75R0 11 8 4 8 0 BYI DECAGC GND1 10 FI02 31M9 0 IREF CVBSINT RX02 10K0 GNDV I2 O1 4 3 91P0 9 SDA SCL GND 2 RI41 2K2 GND2 7 RYI 26 CI05 12P0 GNDV 8 6 5 2,5 QC01 4M433619 4M433619 49 REFO 25 CI09 15P0 RX05 75R0 7 2U2 4 CC06 18P0 50 VCS AV1_CVBS_OUT GNDV 6 CI03 12P0 CI50 51 EHTO VP1 1 I1 GNDAU 5 - GND2 XTAL1 24 RI04 82R0 CI53 10N0 IFIN2 23 GNDT 4 AV1 FI20 K9650M 7 3 4 RV25 100N0 3,9 39K2 3,9 GND2 3 - 2 AV2 2 CV26 3 XTAL2 CHROMA 6 1 GND2 GND2 GND2 5 68p FI01 40M4 BX01 RI50 680R0 1 2 2,1 3 GNDT 8 4 O2 5 GND IFIN1 SW01 I2 1 4,6 CVBS/Y 2 GND 4,6 O1 4 22 1 I1 RI33 2K2 CI04 6P8 21 RI07 100R0 CI02 6P8 AV2/AV3_Y/CVBS IF FI10 QFWG3970M - CHROMA_AV2/AV3 NH01 CTT5010 CI10 1N0 GND1 RI32 2K2 - VDRB TDA8855H ICC17 First issue 07 / 98 AMPLIFIER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM - SCHEMA DE L’AMPLIFICATEUR - SCHALTBILD AUDIO-SIGNALVERABEITUNG - SCHEMA DELL’ AMPLIFICATORE ESQUEMA DEL AMPLIFICADOR (STEREO) RS63 470R0 CS17 AHVSS GNDV CS09 1N0 AV3_L (OS) CS39 470P0 RS55 6K8 °VIRTUAL LS10 4U7 DOLBY AHVSS CS36 470P0 RS12 18R0 CS15 10N0 CS14 220U0 CS18 AHVSS +8V AHVSS 3,7 AHVSS CS46 3U3 AV3_R (OS) AV2_IN_L AV2_IN_R RS53 6K8 (OS) (OS) RS54 6K8 CS53 1U0 CS52 RS52 1U0 AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS CS54 820P0 CS55 820P0 CS56 820P0 (OS) RS51 6K8 CS51 1U0 AV1_IN_R (OS) RS50 6K8 CS50 1U0 CS35 CS57 820P0 AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS 3,7 3,7 0 3,7 1U0 AHVSS CS43 10U0 AHVSS CS42 100N0 AHVSS RS02 6K8 AHVSS 0,2 TS01 BC847B 4,1 RS04 180R0 LS20 10U0 CS01 22N0 QS40 18M432 RS20 4R7 CS02 47P0 AHVSS 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 DVSS 61 62 CS23 10N0 CS41 1P0 AHVSS DVSS CS40 1P0 - NC SC2_OUT_L NC VREF1 ASG3 SC1_OUT_R DACM_L SC1_OUT_L DACM_R CAPL_A VREF2 AHVSUP DACA_L CAPL_M DACA_R AHVSS RESETQ AGNDC NC NC NC NC NC NC I2S_DA_IN2 SC3_IN_L SC3_IN_R DVSS DVSUP ASG2 ADR_CL SC2_IN_L ADR_WS SC2_IN_R ADR_DA ASG1 I2S_DA_IN1 SC1_IN_L I2S_DA_OUT SC1_IN_R I2S_WS VREFTOP MONO_IN AVSS AVSUP ANA_IN1+ ANA_IN- 31 ° 29 NC STANDBYQ ADR_SEL D_CTR_OUT0 TESTEN D_CTR_OUT1 XTAL_IN NC XTAL_OUT NC AUD_CL_OUT CS75 4U7 0 27 26 GNDP RS79 1K0 CS04 CS76 4U7 1N0 5 CS74 1N0 CS27 1N0 22 21 RS78 4K7 AHVSS DVSS 19 18 CS78 1U0 RS76 4K7 9 15 RS80 1K0 CS80 470P0 LS40 RS42 15U0 470R0 RS41 47R0 LS41 RS43 15U0 470R0 CS25 470U0 16 15 14 DVSS DVSS 13 12 CS34 47P0 5 3 CS07 1N0 DVSS CS93 1N0 6 5 4 LS25 4U7 RS29 220R0 DS90 BZX55C3V6 3 RS99 100R0 2 RS97 1K0 GNDP 1 RS92 10K0 RS96 18K0 CS82 1U0 25,4 TS81 BC847B 4,8 RS90 10K0 RS98 15K0 BS80 BQ09 AHVSS FCB 4,2 RS93 18K0 DVSS CS81 100N0 CS85 470U0 CS94 1N0 CS95 1N0 2 AMDP GNDV CS59 4N7 AHVSS GNDP 2 1 1 GNDP 2 1 BS90 BS91 R MAIN (AP) .17000.00 (FM-Stereo) CS08 1N0 GNDT CS92 1N0 1 BA002 3 DVSS AHVSS CS91 470U0 °1MI0 2 GND-HEATSINK AHVSS CS90 470U0 DVSS RS27 10K0 8 CS88 100N0 RS88 4R7 CS24 1N0 °VIRTUAL RS91 DOLBY 15K0 BS02 CS06 1N0 AHVSS 3 33 IS80 TDA7269 DVSS 17 +8V GNDP GND_HEATSINK AHVSS 5 RS83 22K0 RS84 22K0 GNDP RS95 100K0 GNDP 25,4 7 AHVSS AHVSS DVSS 47R0 15 15 8 14,7 4 15 2 10 CS26 2N2 DVSS RS40 14,6 CS87 100N0 6 1 11 23 7 CS79 470P0 CS77 1U0 14,8 DVSS 25 20 RS75 4K7 0 28 24 RS77 4K7 DVSS 30 CS33 11 47P0 I2S_CL 10 4,9 I2C_DA 9 4,9 I2C_CL ANA_IN2+ NC CS73 1N0 32 GNDP CS05 1N0 First issue 07 / 98 38 IS40 MSP3400C-PP-C6 SC2_OUT_R (uP) GNDP ICC17 37 63 CS22 220U0 SDA (uP) -UA (P) 36 60 AHVSS AHVSS +5VON (DP) RESET_MSPMUTE- (uP) +UA (P) 33 4,9 1,5 10N0 35 64 RS05 27R0 SCL (uP) CS32 AHVSS RS03 47R0 0,9 SIF (OS) 3,7 3,7 3,7 3,7 CS31 1N0 RS01 1K5 AHVSS 6K8 AV1_IN_L AM/AF (OS) AHVSS CS47 100N0 34 GNDP LS63 2U2 (OS) 3,7 3,7 10U0 6,8 7,8 10U0 6,9 33 RS87 4R7 5 AV1_OUT_L +8V (P) CS67 10U0 3,7 3,7 GNDP RS85 560R0 AHVSS AHVSS 1 CS66 10U0 RS86 560R0 GNDP RS62 470R0 AHVSS CS84 470U0 4 AV1_OUT_R (OS) LS62 2U2 AV2_OUT_L AHVSS 1 RS61 470R0 Piece de securite N'utilisez que les pieces d'origine 3 (OS) LS61 2U2 CS65 10U0 IS40 = SUB AMVD 19100 00 => VIRTUAL DOLBY = SUB AMDP 17001 00 => DOLBY PROLOGIC = MSP 3410D-PP => STEREO / NICAM = MSP 3400C-PP-C5 => STEREO 2X10W Safety Part When repairing, use original part only 2 RS60 470R0 Sicherheitsbauteil Bei Ersatz nur Originalteil verwenden CS60 1N0 5 CS64 10U0 AHVSS CS61 1N0 GNDP LS60 2U2 AV2_OUT_R (OS) AHVSS CS62 1N0 GNDP AHVSS CS63 1N0 GNDP AHVSS GNDP AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS DVSS AHVSS AHVSS RS67 100K0 CS13 1N0 AHVSS AHVSS RS66 100K0 CS12 1N0 AHVSS RS65 100K0 CS11 1N0 AHVSS RS64 100K0 CS10 1N0 AHVSS L AMPLIFIER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM - SCHEMA DE L’AMPLIFICATEUR - SCHALTBILD AUDIO-SIGNALVERABEITUNG - SCHEMA DELL’ AMPLIFICATORE ESQUEMA DEL AMPLIFICADOR (MONO) AHVSS CS63 1N0 CS62 1N0 CS61 1N0 33 34 RS63 470R0 +8V RS12 18R0 CS14 220U0 10U0 38 CS18 10U0 40 AHVSS AHVSS CS46 3U3 CS47 100N0 AHVSS AHVSS AV1_IN_L AV1_IN_R (OS) (OS) RS51 6K8 CS51 1U0 RS50 6K8 CS50 1U0 AHVSS AHVSS CS54 820P0 36 39 CS15 10N0 AHVSS 35 37 CS17 LS10 4U7 CS60 1N0 CS66 10U0 CS67 10U0 CS84 470U0 AHVSS AHVSS 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 CS55 820P0 AHVSS 48 49 50 AHVSS 51 52 53 54 AM/AF (OS) 55 CS35 1U0 AHVSS CS31 1N0 AHVSS CS43 10U0 AHVSS CS42 100N0 SIF (OS) AHVSS RS02 6K8 RS04 180R0 LS20 10U0 CS01 22N0 TS01 BC847B DVSS 61 62 63 64 RS05 27R0 CS22 220U0 CS02 47P0 SDA (uP) -UA (P) 59 60 QS40 18M432 CS23 10N0 AHVSS CS41 1P0 AHVSS DVSS CS40 1P0 - SC2_OUT_R NC SC2_OUT_L NC ASG3 VREF1 SC1_OUT_R DACM_L SC1_OUT_L DACM_R CAPL_A VREF2 AHVSUP DACA_L CAPL_M DACA_R AHVSS RESETQ AGNDC NC NC NC NC NC NC I2S_DA_IN2 SC3_IN_L DVSS SC3_IN_R DVSUP ASG2 ADR_CL SC2_IN_L ADR_WS SC2_IN_R ADR_DA ASG1 I2S_DA_IN1 SC1_IN_L I2S_DA_OUT SC1_IN_R I2S_WS VREFTOP I2S_CL MONO_IN I2C_DA AVSS I2C_CL NC AVSUP ANA_IN1+ ANA_IN- STANDBYQ ADR_SEL ANA_IN2+ D_CTR_OUT0 TESTEN D_CTR_OUT1 XTAL_IN NC NC XTAL_OUT NC AUD_CL_OUT RS77 4K7 32 31 30 29 AHVSS 28 27 26 CS76 4U7 CS04 DVSS CS74 1N0 23 CS27 1N0 22 21 18 RS78 4K7 LS40 RS42 15U0 470R0 RS41 47R0 LS41 RS43 15U0 470R0 RS80 1K0 AHVSS 2 10 5 4 IS80 TDA7269 RS84 22K0 3 AHVSS DVSS DVSS 13 CS33 47P0 CS34 47P0 CS24 1N0 DVSS RS88 4R7 CS88 100N0 CS90 470U0 10 9 RS27 10K0 8 7 6 4 RS83 22K0 8 DVSS 14 5 CS87 100N0 6 9 7 CS80 470P0 LS25 4U7 RS29 220R0 DS90 BZX55C3V6 3 RS99 100R0 2 CS92 1N0 RS97 1K0 1 RS92 10K0 RS96 18K0 DVSS 47R0 CS78 1U0 1 CS25 470U0 15 DVSS RS40 RS79 1K0 CS26 2N2 16 11 RS76 4K7 AHVSS DVSS 17 12 GNDP CS77 0 1N0 24 19 RS87 4R7 11 AHVSS 25 20 CS79 470P0 CS73 1N0 GNDP RS85 560R0 AHVSS CS82 1U0 RS98 15K0 CS81 100N0 RS93 18K0 (uP) AHVSS TS81 BC847B DVSS CS85 1MI0 CS94 1N0 GNDP +5VON (DP) RESET_MSPMUTE- (uP) +UA (P) 10N0 AHVSS RS20 4R7 AHVSS SCL (uP) CS32 AHVSS RS03 47R0 57 58 AHVSS RS01 1K5 56 AHVSS IS40 MSP3400C-PP-C6 RS86 560R0 GNDP AHVSS GNDP (OS) CS13 1N0 RS62 470R0 LS63 2U2 AHVSS GNDP CS12 1N0 LS62 2U2 AV1_OUT_R (OS) AV1_OUT_L +8V (P) RS67 100K0 AHVSS AHVSS GNDP RS66 100K0 AHVSS DVSS AHVSS AHVSS AHVSS GNDP CS59 4N7 RS95 100K0 GNDP GND_HEATSINK CS05 1N0 AHVSS GND-HEATSINK CS06 1N0 AHVSS Piece de securite N'utilisez que les pieces d'origine AHVSS RS90 10K0 GNDP 2 RS91 15K0 GNDP MAIN (AP) 1 BS90 R .17002.00 DVSS CS07 1N0 Sicherheitsbauteil Bei Ersatz nur Originalteil verwenden Safety Part When repairing, use original part only GNDT +8V AHVSS DVSS CS08 1N0 GNDV AHVSS ICC17 29 30 First issue 07 / 98 LOCATION OF CONTROLS - EMPLACEMENT DES REGLAGES SERVICE LAGEPLAN - POSIZIONE REGOLATORI DI SERVIZIO SITUACIÓN DE LOS AJUSTES LP44 RP76 U STBY 265V (ASIA) BR01 264V (EUR) 140 QR01 1 190 4Mhz 1 T 2.5A L BP01 FP01 PP64 -UA 1 CP92 DP80 CP80 DP72 +UA DP84 CP82 U- BL02 1 CP97 FI50 8V IP95 VIDEO 5,74Mhz FI30° DL12 DP85 U Timer IX01 77,8Mhz JF14 FI02 31,9Mhz +5V UP FI01 5V DST FI10 USYS 1 1 IV0 3,579545Mhz QC02 +5V ON QC01 40,4Mhz 4,433619Mhz NH01 LX18 DP82 BV01 BP15 CP84 FI20 RP92 LS25 BF01 IS40 1 LS10 QS40 BX01 BX02 1 IF01 ° it is not necessary , to adjust FI30 by after sales focus G2/cutoff BX50 Part of board connected to mains supply. Partie du châssis reliée au secteur. Primärseite des Netzteils. Parte dello châssis collegata alla rete. Parte del chassis conectada a la red. ! Use isolating mains transformer Utiliser un transformateur isolateur du secteur Trenntrafo verwenden Utilizar un transformador aislador de red Utilizzare un trasformatore per isolarvi dalla rete www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr ICC17 First issue 07 / 98 ADJUSTMENTS - REGLAGES - EINSTELLUNGEN - REGOLAZIONI - AJUSTES U Sys + PP 64 + = 50% DP 80 V= CP 80 trap 40,4Mhz FI 01 Switch set to standard BG Commuter le TV au standard BG trap 31,9Mhz IF Signal 40,4MHz (BG) 31,9MHz (BG) IF Alignment Alignement FI SCREEN Usys 126V+/-0,5V 132V+/-0,5V 132V+/-0,5V 126V+/-0,5V 126V+/-0,5V 126V+/-0,5V 126V+/-0,5V 138V+/-0,5V 138V+/-0,5V 138V+/-0,5V Jumper JL80 JL81 JL81 JL80 JL80 JL80 JL80 JL82 JL82 JL82 RL65 4k7 24k 24k 4k7 4k7 4k7 4k7 47k 47k 47k FI10 1 V= Adjust FI01 for minimum value at 40,4Mhz RI33 TUNER 1 1nF G U G2 / cutoff Format 4:3 4:3 4:3 4:3 4:3 4:3 4:3 16:9 16:9 16:9 FI20 Adjust FI20 for minimum value at 31,9Mhz 11 50 mV FI 02 Tube A51EFS83X191 A59EHJ43X15 A66EHJ43X15 A59EGD048X30 A68EGD038X30 A68AGA25X01 A80AEJ15X01 W56EGV023X015 W66EGV023X015 W76EGV023X015 + 75Ω + NH01 = 50% V= RI41 DI40 CRT IB01: pins 9 / 12 / 15 AV (no Signal, black screen) 160V highest output 0 FOCUS FOCUS LL05 Sharp picture Test pattern (standard values) www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr ICC17 First issue 07 / 98 GB SERVICE MODE MODE SERVICE F I - ENTER/EXIT SERVICE MODE - ENTREE/SORTIE DU MODE SERVICE 1 ACCESSING THE SERVICE MODE 1 ACCES AU MODE SERVICE Accès avec le clavier du téléviseur TV Control Panel Access • Switch the TV into “Standby” mode by pressing the Standby button on the RCU. • Switch “OFF” the mains supply to the TV and wait for the LED to extinguish. • Whilst holding depressed the PR - and VOL- (8s), switch “ON” the mains supply to the TV. • Once initialised, the Main Service Menu will appear on the screen of the TV. Soft-Ver. Config. Serial-No. V1.00-0 A5- - - -N 103465071 • Commuter le téléviseur en position de veille avec la télécommande. Eteindre le téléviseur par l’interrupteur secteur (attendre l’extinction complète du voyant). • Tout en appuyant sur les touches PR - et VOL - , mettre le TV en service à l'aide de la touche M/A. • Maintenir enfoncées les touches PR - et VOL -. (8s) Le menu suivant apparaît. Soft-Ver. Config. Serial-No. 0080 V1.00-0 A5- - - -N 103465071 QUIT TUBE SETUP GEOMETRY VIDEO QUIT TUBE SETUP GEOMETRY VIDEO IF IF 0080 Please Note: Note : In the service mode : - The CHILD LOCK function is re-initialised.The LOCK function (PIN number) is ignored. - All Wake-up/Sleep timer settings are CLEARED. - SCART socket pin 8 switching voltages are ignored. - AV-Link, WSS Detection, EPG and TELETEXT functions are disabled. - Automatic standby mode switching functions (no signal conditions) are disabled. - Brightness, Colour and Contrast are set to factory defaults. - Sharpness settings are set to MID position. - Contrast Expand is set to LOW. - Automatic INSTALL mode is disabled. - FORMAT and ZOOM are reset to factory defaults. En mode service: - Le verrouillage parental est effacé ( réinitialisé ). - La fonction de verrouillage ( Pin number ) est ignorée. - La programmation des heures «reveille/matin» est annulée. - Possibilité de passer en mode service avec commutation lente active. - AV- Link , la détection WSS, l’EPG et le Vidéotexte ne sont pas validés. - La fonction de stand-by automatique en cas d’absence de signal d’antenne n’est pas validée. - Les valeurs de réglages usine sont affectées au contraste, à la couleur et à la lumière. - Le contour est appelé à sa valeur moyenne. - L’expansion contraste est au niveau bas. - Le mode ambiance «Light sensor» n’est pas valides. - Zoom et format ignorées. 2 TEMPORARY EXIT FROM SERVICE MODE 2 SORTIE TEMPORAIRE DU MODE SERVICE - Press the “EXIT” button on the RCU. - Pressing the “MENU” button on the RCU will activate the customer menus. - Utiliser la touche Exit de la télécommande. - Le menu utilisateur peut être accessible via la touche «Menu». - The Service Menu can be re-entered by pressing the “BLUE” button on the RCU. - Pour entrer à nouveau dans le mode service utliliser la touche bleue. 3 SORTIE DEFINITIVE DU MODE SERVICE 3 EXITING FROM SERVICE MODE Remote Control TV Control Panel - Select the “QUIT” line of the “Main Service Menu”. - Press «<», «OK» or «>» button ON/OFF key or “Stand-by” buttons - RCU “Standby” button or switch “OFF” mains supply. - Press «VOL.+»button - TV mode. Values or adjustment not “STORED” before exiting the service mode will NOT be “SAVED” in the NVM. télécommande clavier du téléviseur - Aller au point «QUIT» dans le menu principal du mode service. - Appuyer sur «<», «OK» ou «>» First issue 07 / 98 - Foncion Stand-by ou «off» par M/A -Appuyer sur «VOL+» - Mode TV. Les valeurs ou réglages non mémorisées avant la sortie ne seront pas écrites en NVM. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr ICC17 Inter M/A ou Stand-by II - NAVIGATION INSIDE THE SERVICE MODE - DEPLACEMENT DANS LE MODE SERVICE FUNCTIONS WALLIN SERVICE MODE - OPZIONI NEL SERVICE MODE - BUSQUEDA EN MODO SERVICIO 1 Soft-Ver. Config. Serial-No. REMOTE CONTROL - TELECOMMANDE - FERNBEDIENUNG TELECOMANDO - MANDO A DISTANCIA V1.00-0 A5- - - -N 103465071 V1.00-0 A5- - - -N 103465071 0080 QUIT TUBE SETUP GEOMETRY VIDEO ➠ DISPLAYING THE VALUE OF THE SETTING - AFFICHAGE DES VALEURS - ANZEIGE DES EINSTELL WERTS VISUALIZZAZIONE DEL VALORE DELLA REGOLAZIONE VISUALIZACION DEL VALOR DE AJUSTE H-Position ➠ QUIT TUBE SETUP GEOMETRY VIDEO Soft-Ver. Config. Serial-No. 0080 3 Naviagation down Naviagation up > - Select option - Option anwählen - Selezionare l’opzione - Seleccionar opción VALUE 4 TV CONTROL PANEL - CLAVIER TV - TASTATUR DES FERNSEHGERÄTS - COMANDI DEL TELEVISORE V1.00-0 A5- - - -N 103465071 Soft-Ver. Config. Serial-No. 0080 QUIT TUBE SETUP GEOMETRY VIDEO V1.00-0 A5- - - -N 103465071 QUIT TUBE SETUP GEOMETRY VIDEO 0080 SELECT Display ➠ - < NVM value : :Enable function + - - Select option - Option anwählen - Selezionare l’opzione - Seleccionar opción - “Change“ value - Wert “änden“ - “Cambiare“ valore - “Cambiar“ valor 5 Vol. + Vol. - + VALUE VALUE ➠ ➠ ➠ ➠ Store FULL SCREEN GEOMETRY ➠ ZOOM0 Return System Voltage H-VCO H-Delay V-Blanking V-Amplitude V-Position UP DOWN -3B +1B -23 1E Copîes RAM values into NVM Copie la valeur RAM en NVM Kopieren des Werts von RAM nach NVM Copiare i valori RAM in NVM Copiar valores RAM en NVM H-Blanking +3B H-Blanking Symmetry -19 Default Store Restore +0A 1B CHANGE UP Restore DOWN CHANGE ➠ Copies all values from NVM into RAM. Copie toutes les valeurs des données NVM en RAM Kopiert alle NVM-Datenwerte in den RAM Copiare tutti i valori da NVM sulla RAM Copia todos los valores de NVM a RAM ROM Default ➠All the default values of a page in use are stored in RAM. L’ensemble des valeurs par défaut d’une page courante est chargé en RAM. Sämtliche Standardwerte der aktuellen Seite werden im RAM geladen Tutti i valori di default di una pagina in uso vengono memorizzati sulla RAM Todos los valores por defecto de la página en curso están almacenados en RAM. QUIT TUBE SETUP GEOMETRY VIDEO IF A1Z-DKC Serial-N0. AI6------ Character 1 : Factory : «A»= Angers , «C» =Celle, «T» =Tarancon Character 2 : Year : «G» = 1996, «H»= 1997 etc.. Character 3 : Month, from : «1»=January to «C»=December Character 4-9 : Serial N0. STORING VALUES IN MEMORY - MEMORISATION DES VALEURS - SPEICHERN DER WERTE - MEMORIZZAEZ I VALORI - VALORES ALMACENADOS EN LA MEMORIA The box becomes During alignment, values are temporarily stored in RAM. En cours d’alignement les valeurs sont mémorisées temporairement en RAM Während des Abgleichs werden die Werte vorübergehend im RAM gespeichert Durante l’allineamento i valori vengono memorizzati provvisoriamente sulla RAM Durante el ajuste, los valores son almacenados temporalmente en RAM GEOMETRY Config. - After setting, the values are stored in NVM. Après réglages les valeurs sont mémorisées en NVM. Nach dem Einstellen werden die Werte im NVM gespeichert. Dopo la regolazione i valori vengono memorizzati in NVM. Después del ajuste, los valores son almacenados en NVM 0080 Character 1 : Tube type : «A»= 4/3 , «W» =16/9 Character 2 : Chassis type : «5» = 50Hz, Character 3 : Zoom available : «Z»=yes, «-»=not Character 4 : Ambiant Sensor : «S»= detected, «-»= not Character 5 : Dolby : «D»=detected, «-»= not Character 6 : AV Link detected : «K»=IR link detected, «-»= not Character 7 : Chassis Variant: «N»= Nicam, «S»=Stereo : Disable function - V1.00-0 A5- - - -N 103465071 TV CONFIGURATION - CONFIGURATION DU TV - GERÄTEKONFIGURATION CONFIGURAZIONE DEL TV - CONFIGURACIÕN DEL TV Naviagation up - Soft-Ver. Config. Serial-No. Counter Compteur Betriebsstundenzähler Contador Contatore Alignment Alignement Abgleich Regolazione Alineacion PR + PR + Naviagation down DOWN Serial Number N° de série Serien-Nr. Numero seriale N° Serie Navigation inside the Service Mode Navigation dans le Service Mode Funktionen im Service Mode Opzioni del Service Mode Búsqueda en el Modo Servicio TOGGLE FUNCTIONS - VALIDATION DES FONCTIONS EIN-UND AUSSCHALT FUNKTIONEN - FUNZIONI DI COMMUTAZIONE - FUNCION CONMUTACION IF IF UP To enable a function check (tick) the box. Pour valider une fonction cocher la case correspondante Zum Implementieren einer Funktion das Kontrollkästchen aktivieren (ankreuzen) Per implementare una funzione di verifica, (vistare) la casella Para poner en fucionamiento una función verifique (señale) la casilla ➠ Soft-Ver. Config. Serial-No. < ➠ www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 2 VALUE Software Version Version software Software Version Versione software Versión software Chassis Configuration codes. Configuration du récépteur Gerätekonfiguration Composizione del ricevitore Composición del Receptor < Set value : NVM value + > NVM value > MAIN MENU - MENU PRINCIPAL 0E Display ➠ - “Change“ value - Wert “änden“ - “Cambiare“ valore - “Cambiar“ valor 1 00 to FF Hexadecimal value valeur hexadécimale Einstell wert hexadezimal Valore esadecimale Valor héxadecimal IF IF III - LITE-MENU FOR FIELD SERVICE MODE MENUS DU MODE SERVICE TIME COUNTER - COMPTEUR DE TEMPS - BETRIEBSSTUNDENZÄHLER CONTATORE - CONTADOR The counter indicates the TV’s number of service hours.It counts from to 0 to 65535 hours. The display is hexadecimal. Le compteur de temps indique le nombre d’heures de service du TV. Il compte de 0 à 65535 heures. L’affichage est en hexadécimal. Der Zähler zeigt an, wieviele Stunden der Fernseher in Betrieb ist. Die Anzeige ist hexadezimal. Il contatore indica il numero di ore di servizio del TV. Puo’ contatore da 0 a 65535. La visualizzazione è esadecimale. El contador indica el número de horas de servicio de la TV. Cuenta de 0 a 65535 horas. El visualizador es hexadecimal. 2 SUBMENU - SOUS-MENU Navigation inside the Service Mode Navigation dans le Service Mode Funktionswahl im Service Mode Opzioni del Service Mode Busquena en el Modo Servicio VIDEO Return Factory Norm. Drive Adjust. R-Drive G-Drive B-Drive Peak-White Scale Bright Scale Colour Scale Contr. Default Store Restore PAL BG Hexadecimal value Valeur hexadecimale de reglage Abgleichwerte hexadezimal Valore di regolazione esadecimale Valor del ajuste en hexadecimal 9C 9C 9C 70 5C CC Enable a function Case de validation - Fonction validée si "cochée" Zum Implementieren einer Funktion Per inserire la Funzione Activar una functión ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE - PROCESSUS DE REGLAGES - ABGLEICH - VISUALIZZAZIONE DEL VALORE DELLA REGOLAZIONE - PROCEDIMIENTO DE ALINEACION TUBE Return Tube type A66ECY... Store Restore SETUP GEOMETRY Return Clear Progs. Return V- Slope V-Amplitude V-Position Blanking On S - Correction H-Position H-Amplitude EW-Amplitude EW-Trapezium Default Store Restore Kbd. Config. Default WSS Default Store www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr Restore Return SETUP Verlassen des Untermenüs,das Hauptmenü des service Modes erscheint Chiude il sottomenu e fa apparire il menu principale Field Service Mode. Cierra el submenú. El menú Field Service Mode aparece. Press </>: remote control; Vol. +/- : TV keyb. Tube type After replacing the NVM, the correct tube type number must be entered (6 characters). Once entered, the tubes geometry and video default vales are immediately activated. Variable geometry and video parameters are written to the NVM when the “STORE” line is selected. See table below for tube type numbers. Definit le tube exact après changement de NVM. Les nouvelles valeurs de tubes (avec video et géometrie) sont actives de suite. Les paramètres de vidéo et de géométrie sont chargés en NVM lorsque STORE est sélectionné. Voir liste ci-dessous. Nach Tausch des NVM den bildröhrentyp (6 Ziffern) auswählen. Die neuen Geometrie-und Video-defaultwerte werden sofort aktiv. Variable Geometrie- und Videowerte werden durch Speichern mit "STORE" ins NVM geschrieben. Bildrohrauflistung : siehe unten. Scegliere il tubo appropriato dopo aver sostituito la NVM; i 6 caratteri che indicano il nuovo tipo di tubo, richiamano i valori video e geometria di default. I parametri per video e geometria vengono caricati nella NVM Definir el tubo correcto después de haber cambiado el NVM.6 caracteres.Los nuevos valores de tipo de tubo (con la vídeo y la geometría por defecto) se activan inmediatamente. Los parámetros variables de geometría y vídeo se graban en el NVM al seleccionar la función Store. Vea más abajo la lista de tubos. Tube Name A51EFS83X191 A59EHJ43X15 A66EHJ43X15 A68EGD038X30 A80AEJ13X01 A59EGD048X30 A68AGA25X01 W56EGV023X015 W66EGV023X015 W76EGV023X015 Store (+) LIST name Description A51EFS A59EHJ A66EHJ A68EGD A80AEJ A59EGD A68AGA W56EGV W66EGV W76EGV GEOMETRY Return Return Closes the sub-menu and returns to the “Main Service Menu”.Press </> on the RCU or VOL+/VOL- on TV front panel. Retourne au menu principal. After setting 54 94 70 78 98 Test Pattern Signal used: 4/3 with geometric circle. TUBE 4:3; 21” OT; AK-Mask; Coty-M 4:3; 25” MP; AK-Mask; Vector 4:3; 28” MP; AK-Mask; Vector 4:3; 29” SF; Invar; Vector 4:3; 33” MP AK-Mask; Coty-M 4:3; 25” SF; Invar-Mask; Vector 4:3; 29” VHP; AK-Mask; Coty-M 16:9; 24” SF; Invar-Mask; Vector 16:9; 28” SF; Invar-Mask; Vector 16:9; 32” SF; Invar-Mask; Vector Closes the sub-menu and returns to the “Main Service Menu”. Retourne au menu principal. Verlassen des Untermenüs Chiude il sottomenu e fa apparire il menu principale Field Service Mode. Cierra el submenú. El menú Field Service Mode aparece. Press </>: remote control; Vol. +/- : TV keyb. Clear Prog. Clears all programmes STORED in memory and RESETS all PICTURE and SOUND settings to the factory default values. The AUTO INSTALL (out of factory) mode can be initialised by a long press (> 5sec.) of the selection button. Efface tous les programmes mémorisés. valeurs SON et IMAGES: valeurs usines. Pour sortir des valeurs usine : Selection : Long press:2,5s Löscht alle Programme und ersetzt alle Ton-und Bildeinstellungen durch Fabrikwerte. Nach erneutem Einschalten erscheint das Installationsmenü. Anwahl: 2,5s drücken Clear Prog. Cancella tutti i programmi in memoria.I Valori analogici SUONO E IMMAGINE vengono riportati a livello di default. Per ristabilire le condizioni di uscita fabbrica, selezionare la funzione e premere per 2,5sec Programa de borrado. Borra todos los programas almacenados en la memoria.Valores análogos de SOUND PICTURE: valores de fábrica.Regreso a la TV para "salir del modo fábrica".Selección: Presión larga igual a 2,5 s. active-aktiv No active-inaktiv Kbd. Config Factory adjusted Reserve au reglage usine Reserviert für fabrikeinstellungen Riservato alla regolazione di fabbrica Kbd. Config Default WSS Automatic detection of DOLBY surround sound and 16/9 Format pictures via Teletext line number 23 is valid on all programmes. Sélection du process WSS valid pour tous programmes WSS (nur bei 16:9 oder Dolby) Auswertung der Zeile 23 zur automatischen Format umschaltung und Dolby umschaltung Idendificazione "auto-surround" e "format" tramite il televideo, decodificando la riga 23. La selezione di WSS è valida per tutti i programmi. Detección "auto-surround" y "format" a través de la línea 23 de Teletext.La selección del procesamiento WSS es válida para todos los programas. detect.enable- aktiv disable-inaktiv VIDEO Return Factory Norm. Drive Adjust. R-Drive G-Drive B-Drive Peak-White Scale Bright Scale Colour Scale Contr. Default Store Restore 7C 6C 7C Closes the sub-menu and returns to the “Main Service Menu”. Retourne au menu principal. Verlassen des Untermenüs Chiude il sottomenu e fa apparire il menu principale Field Service Mode. Cierra el submenú. El menú Field Service Mode aparece. Press </>: remote control; Vol. +/- : TV keyb. V-Blanking Press </> on the RCU or VOL+/VOL- on TV front panel. 1.Select the standard 4:3 format and zoom mode 0. 1.Sélectionner le mode zoom standard 4/3 pour tube 4/3 1.Wählen Sie den Standard-Zoom 4:3 bei 4:3 Bildröhren. 1.Selezionare il modo zoom standard 4/3 per tubo 4/3 1.Seleccione el modo de zoom estándar 4/3 para tubo 4/3. 2.Apply a test pattern signal to the TV with a single horizontal and vertical line on the screen. 2.appliquer une MIRE de BARRE avec seulement une ligne blanche horizontale en milieu de l'ecran 2.Speisen Sie ein Testbild mit nur einem horizontalen Strich in der Bildmitte ein. 2.Applicare un monoscopio con un'unica linea bianca orizzontale al centro dello schermo 2.Aplique una plantilla de prueba con sólo una línea blanca horizontal en el centro de la pantalla. 3.Select “Blanking On” line of the menu and ENABLE (tick) the function, the bottom half of the screen will go black. 3.Positinner dans le mode Service Blanking On la moitié basse de l' ecran devient noire 3.Schalten Sie den Blanking-Mode ein. Die untere Hälfte des Bildschirms wird schwarz. 3.Posizionarsi in modo Service Blanking on; la parte inferiore dello schermo divienta nera 3.Pase al modo Service Blanking On. La mitad inferior de la pantalla se vuelve negra. 4.Select the “V_Slope” line of the menu and adjust its value until the centre line of the pattern is just invisible. 4.Aligner "Vertical - Slope" pour que la ligne mediane soit a peine non visible 4.Regeln Sie "V-Slope" so ein, dafl die Mittellinie nahezu verschwindet. 4.Allineare la "Vertical Slope" in modo che la linea centrale sia appena visibile 4.Alinee "Vertical-Slope" para que la línea mediana sea casi invisible. 5.Return to the “Blanking On” line of the menu and DISABLE (un-tick) the function. 5 Revenir à Blanking On et mettre 5.Schalten Sie den Blanking-Mode wieder ein und 5.Ritornare in modo Blanking on e porre 5.Vuelva a "Blanking on" y poner 6.Switch the test pattern signal to the crosshatch geometry pattern. 6.Positioner la mire de quadrillage 6.Speisen Sie ein Gittertestbild ein. 6.Posizionare il monoscopio 6.Coloque la plantilla cuadriculada. 7.Perform the geometry adjustments described below. 7.Effectuer les reglages de geometrie d'écrits ci- dessous 7.Nehmen Sie die Geometrieeinstellung wie unten beschrieben vor: PAL BG IF Return AGC Take Over 9C 9C 9C 88 GEOMETRY MODE ALIGNMENT 4/3 picture tube FFI - Bit 70 5C CC Default Store Restore Signal : 4/3 test pattern overscan V=107% , H=107% 1- Adjust Vertical position and Vertical amplitude 2- Adjust Vertical Blanking and linearity Adjust separate for 4/3 and 16/9 format. See annexed The signals colour standard is auto detected and displayed opposite the main menu line. VIDEO GEOMETRY 9.Adjust position H. 9.Regler la position H 9.Korrigieren Sie Horizontale Lage. 9.Regolare la posizione H 9.Ajuste la posición H 10.Ajuster l'amplitude H 10.Adjust amplitude H. 10.Korrigieren Sie Horizontal-Amplitude 10 Regolare l'ampiezza H 10.Ajuste la amplitud H 11-12.Correction of EW pincushion distortion. 11-12.Correction de coussin EW 11-12.Korrektur der Ost/West Kissenverzerrung. 11-12.Correzione della distorsione a cuscino EW 11-12.Corrección de la distorsión de cojín EW. 13.Correction of corners (Shape). 13.Correction de coins (Shape) 13.Korrektur der Ecken. 13.Correzione degli angoli (Forma) 13.Corrección de esquinas (Shape) 14.Trapeze. / Trapèze 14 Trapez-Verzerrung. 14.Trapezio / Trapecio "These adjustments are not necessary for 4:3 tubes in 16:9 mode" "Pour les tubes 4/3 en mode 16/9, ces reglages ne sont pas necessaire" “Diese Einstellungen sind nicht für 4:3 Bildröhren im 16:9 Betrieb erforderlich.“ "Queste regolazioni non sono necessarie per tubi 4/3 in modo 16/9" "Estos ajustes no son necesarios para los tubos 4/3 en modo 16/9" PAL Closes the sub-menu and returns to the “Main Service Menu”. Press </> on the RCU or VOL+/VOL- on TV front panel. Retourne au menu principal. Verlassen des Untermenüs Chiude il sottomenu e fa apparire il menu principale Field Service Mode. Cierra el submenú. El menú Field Service Mode aparece. Press </>: remote control; Vol. +/- : TV keyb. Factory settings recalled User settings kept. + =nom. Grey scale test pattern white =100% overscan V=120% , H=120% Fast filter (IF /PLL) Filtre rapide (FI /PLL) Schnelles filter (ZF/PLL) Filtro rapido (IF /PLL) 16 / 9 standard mode zoom 0 Asie grey + R - Drive + Europ =nom. Grey scale test pattern white =100% G - Drive B - Drive After setting white + + white =100% Tube Type [init] Blue cathode 420 (600max) A80AEJ 240 (340max) A59EHJ A59EGD A66EHJ 380 400 300 (540max) (470max) (430max) W56EGV W66EGV W76EGV 520 (610max) 480 (560max) 300 (350max) A68EGD 350 (410max) + Scal. Brightness Adjust the vertical height : V =90% Note : * adjust separate for PAL/NTSC/SECAM and RGB/AV getrennte Einstellung für PAL/SEACAM und RGB/AV * * After PEAK white adjustment control cut off setting. Repeat the adjustments if necessary. Nach der Einstellung von "Peak white" die "Cut off"Einstellungen wiederholen. <16 / 9> zoom 1 [init] Tube Type A51EFS EW Trapezium Store (+) =nom. Peek white test pattern CRT Pin 6,8,11 EW Amplitude <4/3> zoom 1 Adjust the vertical height until V = 80% G-Cut off* Blue cathode H-Amplitude 4-Adjust EW Amplitude ,EW Shape and Trapezium FFi - Bit + R-Cut off* H-Position S - Minimum noise- Minimum de bruit - Minimum Rauschen- Rumore minimo - Minimo ruido Normalise User Settings V-Position S -Correction 4/3 standard mode zoom 0 3- Adjust Horizontal position and Horizontal ampltude AGC Recalls the factory settings for colour, brightness, contrast and sharpness and sets contrast expand to "low". Peak-White** V-Amplitude IF Return = 50% = 100% 16/9 picture tube Signal : 4/3 test pattern Grey scale test pattern white =100% EW -Shape overscan V=107%, H =107% 1- Adjust Vertical position and Vertical amplitude 2- Adjust Vertical Blanking and linearity black Scal*. Colour + + =nom. PAL (then SECAM +RGB) 75% Colour bar test pattern via RF. 16 / 9 standard mode zoom 0 3- Adjust Horizontal position and Horizontal ampltude Blue Cathode CRT 4-Adjust EW Amplitude ,EW Shape and Trapezium = 7.Effettuare le regolazioni di geometria descritte in precedenza 7.Efectúe los ajustes geométricos descritos más abajo. 8.Store /Memoriser /Speichern /Memorizzare /Almacene Correct After setting F-H incorrect Store (+) Scal. Contrast factory settings. ICC17 First issue 07/ 98 SUB AUDIO SIGNAL MODULE - SUB MODULE AUDIO - AUDIO SIGNAL SUBMODUL - SUB MODULO AUDIO PINS of IC 64 33 SC2OUTR 100N0 10U0 CS207 DGND CS206 SC2OUTL SC1OUTR SC1OUTL +8V CAPLA CAPLM SC4INL AGNDC SC4INR AGND SC3INL SC3INR SC2INL SC2INR SC1INL SC1INR VREFTOP MONOIN +5VA ANAIN1+ ANAIN- SUB AUDIO MODULE VIRTUAL DOLBY ANAIN2+ XTALIN DGND XTALOUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 BS002 TP2 1 DGND TP1 1 DGND 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 CS102 10N0 AHVSS AGNDC SC4INL SC4INR ASG3 SC3INL SC3INR ASG1 SC2INL SC2INR ASG0 SC1INL SC1INR VREFTOP VREFTOP MONOIN AVSS AVSS 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 DGND IS100 MSP3410D(DIE) AVSUP AVSUP ANAIN1+ ANAINANAIN2+ TESTEN XTALIN XTALOUT DMACSYNC AUDCLOUT NP NP NP DCTROUT1 DCTROUT0 ADRSEL STANDBYQ NP AGND CS106 1N0 IS200 DPL3518(DIE) 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 +5VD 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AGND AHVSS CAPLM AHVSUP AVHSUP CAPLA SC1OUTL SC1OUTR VREF1 VREF1 SC2OUTL SC2OUTR ASG3 TESTNEU DACMSUB DACML DACMR VREF2 VREF2 AVSUP NC NC NC TESTEN XTALIN XTALOUT DCTRIN AUDCLOUT NP NP NP DCTRIO1 DCTRIO0 ADRSEL STANDBYQ NP RESETQ I2SDAOU2 I2SDAIN2 DVSS DVSS DVSUP DVSUP NP NC NC NC I2SDAIN1 I2SDAOU1 I2SWS I2SCL I2CDA I2CCL 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 CAPLC1 AHVSUP AHVSUP CAPLC2 SC1OUTL SC1OUTR VREF1 VREF1 SC2OUTL SC2OUTR ASG3 DACC1L DACC1R VREF2 VREF2 DACC2L DACC2R 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 +8V 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 DACAL DACAR RESETQ I2SDAIN2 DVSS DVSS DVSUP DVSUP ADRCL ADRWS NP ADRDA I2SDAIN1 I2SDAOU1 I2SWS I2SCL I2CDA I2CCL CS101 220N0 CS202 10N0 AHVSS AHVSS AGNDC SC3INL SC3INR ASG2 SC2INL SC2INR ASG1 SC1INL SC1INR VREFTOP VREFTOP MONOIN AVSS AVSS AVSUP AGND CS104 DACML DACMR DACAL DACAR RESETQ DGND CS105 DGND 1 100N0 ICC17 First issue 07 / 98 100N0 PINS of IC 10N0 DGND SUB AMVD 19100 00 10N0 CS205 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 1N0 SUB AMVD 1N0 CS204 +5VD I2CDA CS103 I2CCL ADRSEL CS203 +5VD BS001 32 +5VD +5VA AGND +5VD TECHNICAL INFORMATION Chassis concerned : ICC17 (25"MP & 28"MP) Symptom/ Problem observed : Spare Parts List, component part number amendment. Solution implemented : To optimize the CRT heater supply voltage for the above mentioned tubes, both LL05(DST) and LB02 (coil) have been changed. LL05 : Old Part No. 10546610 ---> New Part No. 10600190 LB02 : Old Part No. 10477930 ---> New Part No. 25349470 Comment : Both components must be replaced at the same time. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr TECHNICAL INFORMATION Finished products / Chassis concerned : All TV sets equiped with ICC17 chassis (CRT Board) Subject : Protection of transistor TB02 against arcing Symptom/ Problem observed : Transistor type number BF422 used in position TB02 found defective. Cause : Arcing. Solution implemented : - Remove the resistor at location RB13. - On the copper side of the CRT PCB, add an insulated wire link between pin 1 of inductor LB02 and pin 4 of the CRT socket (ground). 10533820 CRT 17000 N 00 Q CB06 P LB06 BB02 R 1 RB13 RB12 TB02 E LB02 B C BB 05 CB03 1 BB04 E 0 RB03 RB05 RB02 RB04 LB51 LB71 LB31 RB07 RB08 IB01 BB06 1 TB01 C 1 DB04 B DB71 RB71 DB31 2 RB01 DB70 RB31 DB51 RB51 BB01 1 RB11 BB03 DB30 DB50 LB01 CB01 CB04 IRIS CODE: the code mentioned below must be used to report this failure on the warranty sheet. It will make your report easier and more reliable Condition/ Symptom 1 3 1 Part No Qty 5 Position R B 1 Section 3 V P A You do not need to write anything in the white boxes. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr Fault Code Repair Code Y T TECHNICAL INFORMATION Chassis concerned : ICC17 Symptom/ Problem observed : Moiré patterning visible on some channels. Cause : High frequency cross modulation. Solution implemented - Remove the jumper link at location JR06. - Remove the inductor at location LR20. - Replace LR10 10µH inductor with a jumper link. J L K M CP72 RP76 DR10 BR01 CP73 JR01 JR02 DR20 1 JR10 QR01 CR99 RR04 JR03 BR06 CR10 1 BS80 RV31 JX94 1 0 CV08 1 RS88 0 BV01 CS90 BS90 JS15 RV30 RV01 LV07 BS02 1 BS91 DR23 RR58 RR50 RR51 JR07 LR10 RR77 JR13 JR11 JR12 10516550/A S91 RR57 RR71 RR73 RR75 JV04 JR04 JR05 RR76 RR74 RR72 RR70 RR82 RR78 LR20 JR06 BR07 RR45 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr VHF / UHF TUNER CTT5010 ( For information only ) CH29 22N RH11 22K CH07 1P TH01 S595TR DH02 BB535 LH02 RH06 22K CH05 10P LH05 LH04 CH09 100P LH03 LH06 DH06 BB535 CH03 12P CH14 100P LH09 CH13 100P CH12 100P CH11 9P LH07 CH08 9P CH02 4P7 LH08 LH10 3 CH47 1N RH01 470K CH85 22n TH30 S595TR DH32 BB639C LH34 RH02 22K CH31 10N LH41 9 20 RH70 180R 10 RH71 10K 11 CH79 18P QH70 4MHz DH43 BB639C RH56 330R CH88 1N RH53 100R 10N BII CH56 15N CH89 1N RH55 220R 15 BI RH52 22K DH44 BB639C DH70 BA592 CH82 1N RH41 RH46 22K 470R LH39 RH85 6K8 RH50 39K CH81 1N RH87 56R CH83 39p CH32 1N RH86 4R7 TH80 MMBR571LT1 RH88 2R2 RH49 4R7 RH39 22K RH72 33R 16 BIII Pr. * CH42 VAL CH70 33N LH38 RH33 470K CH40 22N CH55 100P 14 CH35 22N RH42 2R2 LH47 DH45 BA592 RH73 47K I/O-PORTS RH43 22K RH44 22K Ref.- CH49 10N LH36 LH49 RH59 1K2 18 17 Divider TH40 S595TR RH51 10K CH54 100P CH53 1P5 CH59 RH80 4R7 LH48 19 12 4K7 RH58 13 CH37 1N RH30 1R LH81 CH45 220P RH36 470K DH41 BB639C RH31 22K RH38 22K LH37 CH93 22P LH30 LH32 DH33 BB639C CH44 470P LH83 Crystal Oscillator LH33 CH33 82P CH39 4N7 RH81 8R2 LH42 CH28 5P6 RH32 22K RH08 3K9 DH42 BB639C RH45 22K CH36 1N 0P75 CH43 Progr. Divider DH31 BB639C CH38 1N DH34 BB639C 21 DH35 BB639C CH52 1P5 22 8 RH13 10K CH51 1P5 23 PHASEDet.& ChgPmp LH31 LH35 CH86 CH25 47P LH12 CH50 1P5 27p LH43 I2C-Bus Interface RH03 3K9 CH34 1N 7 LH82 2R2 RH82 LH40 RH37 27R Oscillator VHF/HYP RH92 24 15R Isolation Amplifier CH06 1N DH07 BB535 CH23 0.75P 5 Mixer VHF HYP CH95 15N RH04 22K RH14 47K RH15 100K CH24 8P LH11 CH22 1p 26 25 6 2P LH84 CH21 1p 27 4 CH87 RH10 22K CH20 0.75P 28 2 CH48 1N RH09 47R RH05 22K TUA6010X IH70 1 Oscillator UHF DH03 BB535 DH05 BB535 Mixer UHF CH04 100P Isolation Amplifier LH01 RH12 22K CH96 4N7 RH35 150K RH34 150K RH07 150K CH90 10N RH91 4K7 LH22 CH17 82P * DH47 5V6 CH72 1nF CH71 1N CH92 4N7 CH91 4N7 RH93 10K0 LH20 1 INP AGC ICC17 First issue 07 / 98 * DENOTES : NO COMPONENTS IN LAYOUT 2 TU 3 AS 4 CL RH94 3U9 5 DA 6 UB 7 5V 8 LOCK BANDSWITCH BI =03 BII =06 BIII=85 CH78 1N CH94 1N CH76 10N CH75 22P 9 33V 11 IF1 VIDEO AMPLIFIER BOARD - PLATINE AMPLIFICATEURS VIDEO - VIDEOVERSTÄRKERPLATTE - PIASTRA AMPLIFICATORE VIDEO PLATINA AMPLIFICADOR VIDEO G2 FOCUS BL02 7 ICC17 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 U_VIDEO NC GND GND HEAT_2 HEAT_1 SK LB06 68U0 CRT.17000.00 CB06 10U0 TB01 196 BF423 196 CB04 100N0 RB05 560K0 CHASSISGND 0,6 TB02 BF422 BB01 6 ICC17 1 I_CUT GND GND B R G 1 CRT BB02 RB08 47K0 RB02 560K0 195,4 0,1 RB07 560K0 CB03 10U0 DB04 1N4004GP RB04 1K5 LB01 10U0 CB01 10N0 Ri - DB31 BAV21 + Ra BV01 Ri + Ra 3 Ri + Ra LB71 8 137 10U0 2 RB31 560R0 BB05 GG2 LB51 7 147 10U0 3 BG2 RB51 560R0 8 R 6 G 11 B 3,8Vpp-H 1V R G1 IB01 TDA6107Q 2 G2 B 3 CB10 NI * = see CT 170XX partslist 10 CB09 100P0 CRT GND 1V 3,5Vpp-H 1 G 9 CHASSIS GND 1,2V 7 DB50 BAV21 5 6,3 4 3,8Vpp-H 5 RB71 560R0 DB70 BAV21 VIP REF LB02 * RG2 1K5 DB30 BAV21 Rf 2,2 RB01 DB51 BAV21 LB31 Rf 2,5 2 DB71 BAV21 9 136 10U0 1 RB03 0 6 Rf 2,5 1 BB04 VH 196 6 5 4 3 2 1 CRT GND 1 BB03 120Vpp-H 150Vpp-H 150Vpp-H 12 4 BB06 1 CHASSIS GND M a d’ u t B e d n i i a n l M a n u t i l U l u i s e u i z a n u i t e a l z a a δ η χ ρ η 2 1 2 n o n g s - u z i u γ l i n o e n Ο t e s m e g d i n e r a l ι ε ς σ ε ω ς D U 2 1 C 1 M T 2 1 C 2 5 D G 2 1 C 2 8 D G 2 1 C 2 9 D L 2 1 C www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr MAIN BOARD - PLATINE PRINCIPALE - CHASSIS GRUNDPLATTE - PIASTRA PRINCIPALE - PLATINA PRINCIPAL COMPONENT SIDE - COTE COMPOSANTS - BESTÜCKUNGSSEITE - LATO COMPONENTI - LADO COMPONENTES CP72 JP02 JP01 CP63 JR01 JR02 JR10 QR01 1 CP51 CR99 RR04 JP03 RP63 C D CS90 BS80 JS90 CS88 CS91 CS87 JS92 RS87 JS80 RS79 IS80 RS80 CS75 JS72 LX18 CS78 CS76 JS09 JS71 JS49 RV14 CS84 JC02 RV17 DL75 RV16 1 BS91 RR58 JI10 JI05 RI65 CI63 JC01 FI30 CV26 CV21 1 BX04 CS77 LS20 IS40 CS50 CS35 1 IF01 H CS65 CS64 E J K CS18 L B C QS40 CS52 BX02 CX15 CS53 CS43 CS46 CS22 CS14 JS79 BX01 RS61 CS17 CS66 LS10 RS12 CH08 BX08 RX23 RS20 JX79 RX17 RS60 JX07 CS51 CV04 CS67 JX21 JX20 JS11 JS12 JS18 JS21 JX24 CX59 DV19 RH04 RV20 JH07 CC03 RC02 DL71 G DS90 JI04 FI20 JV03 RI50 JV01 JV02 JV05 DL74 CL09 DH01 JH01 LH10 RF05 DL72 JH04 JH03 JX60 RL75 JH08 JH05 CF03 F CS82 LS25 JX61 JX23 1 CH03 RF08 CF07 CL11 RF04 RF07 NH01 CF04 E JV90 CC01 CS85 CX62 JS75 JS74 TX15 RL44 CL08 RF09 CF10 IX01 JC81 JX80 BX50 B RL43 E JF36 E BF01 LL05 ZL11 CL48 TL41 ZL13 CL42 JC84 QC01 JF30 JF31 RL07 RL11 DF01 FI10 CL16 CL13 CF08 CL51 DL51 DL24 TL51 1 DL11 JF12 JF11 DL12 JF17 TL14 E C CV01 JX85 CS25 JF08 CP87 CP98 B BR08 JX88 JX22 RV03 QC02 JL74 JX93 JX92 JX91 JX82 JH02 CL24 DL21 DL22 JL92 B B LV05 GND-AV2 JX83 FI01 1 RS88 CV08 1 CV03 JF14 RL16 1 DL25 CI57 DL09 JF25 RL52 RL13 C RV31 CL72 LL13 CL25 JR09 JF07 CL55 B C BL01 LL32 LL26 RL26 LL33 JF26 E C CL14 RL18 DL13 LL22 TL42 CI50 CL15 DL14 RL24 RL25 1 BS90 JX94 JI02 JI01 DH04 E JF22 JF23 CI54 FI02 CL12 CL22 A JF18 JF19 ZL14 V Z CP96 RL59 RL10 CL21 9 JI03 1 1 B 8 E B C RL01 E TL52 LL60 JL60 B 7 TL34 DP83 JF21 JF24 JF40 JF41 DP94 CL60 RL53 RL37 IP95 1 DL31 1 CL37 RL60 DL33 BL02 RP79 CL53 TL02 TL55 C DL32 RL34 C JR15 JR16 CP97 BV01 LV07 LV06 FI50 BS02 JS15 RV30 1 JL61 RP85 RP80 CL32 TL32 B E DP87 DP72 DR23 RV01 JF10 IP87 RL35 1 E BP85 JF06 JF03 CP81 DP80 RL36 DP84 LL31 CP83 CP93 CP82 C B CL38 DP93 JP08 CP80 TL33 6 LP93 RL65 5 CP94 10516550/A JX90 CP85 DP82 JR13 JR11 JR12 RL57 1 LP82 RR77 1 CP84 CR10 BR07 RR57 RR76 RR74 RR72 RR70 C JR08 JV04 LP50 CP50 E BP15 JR04 JR05 RR50 RR51 JR07 LR10 CP15 RR71 RR73 RR75 TP14 TP15 RR82 RR78 LR20 RP07 JR06 CP01 BP01 1 RR45 B CP13 DP14 RP10 RP15 RP02 JR03 BR06 T 2.5A L LP84 LP80 DR10 BR01 IP61 CP66 PP64 FP01 RP04 LP01 CP02 LP06 RP50 IP50 CP16 DP01 CP17 JP05 DP43 RP05 DP45 DR20 CP73 DP21 DP20 CP69 JP07 DP12 4 M DP03 RP03 LP09 C CP09 JP06 L K RP76 1 CP07 CP08 RP49 3 DP09 CP04 CP11 RP51 DP50 B 2 DP02 DP04 LP44 DP48 CP03 CP05 RP44 RP46 DP47 CP49 RP39 DP59 CP10 J H LP20 DP16 DP17 E CP44 CP43 CP47 TP50 E 1 DP44 G RP20 TP21 CP24 DP18 DP19 CP26 CP06 DP22 CP52 CP58 F CP20 CP22 CP54 TP44 DP41 RP19 CP41 E RP95 RP65 C B DP46 RP52 CP42 D C E C B 0 B RP54 DP53 A GND-AV2 E B C 1 TX45 M N P ICC17 First issue 07 / 98 SOLDER SIDE - CÔTE SOUDURES - LÖTSEITE - LATO SALDATURE - LADO SOLDADURAS CS07 CS33 CS23 CS34 CS41 CS40 CS54 CS56 CS57 CS36 CS27 JS66 CS04 JS65 DS41 CS55 CS39 JS55 CS63 CS62 CS61 CS60 JS53 CS74 CX60 JS62 IS40 JS01 1 RS55 CS80 RS77 CS26 RS40 RS78 JS57 RS75 RS02 BX04 RS85 RS86 10 1 RS84 RS96 RS83 CX18 RS92 IX01 TS81 CX19 LX62 RS93 1 CX61 CS09 DX59 CX58 CS79 RS41 RS29 RS27 RS05 JV53 LX59 JV54 CV09 1 RV15 RV05 RV06 RV07 RS97 JS54 TS01 JS44 DX62 RS99 CC11 CI61 RS03 CV02 JS61 RS54 CV15 CV16 6 CV10 CS06 JS98 RS43 RS76 RI59 CI56 LS40 RS04 RI66 RI51 CI55 RI41 RX39 RX58 CS32 RS52 RS53 JS52 RX08 JX29 JV52 +5V ON RI60 CI51 RV25 8V 1 CS05 CS10 LS60 RX14 RX19 JC52 CV18 CV27 CI45 CV25 CS01 CS02 64 LS41 CV12 CC10 RI31 RI42 TI10 CS08 RS64 CS69 RS65 CS11 JS50 CX17 RX13 RX09 RX18 RX07 JX53 JX54 RX06 RX25 TL71 CL71 CV23 CI58 CV17 1 JI50 RP97 TV10 RV09 RL77 JL72 TL72 CH02 CH20 RI15 RI04 CI16 DI40 RL76 RL47 JX52 JF54 CI09 CC06 CC07 RV19 JI51 RP99 CC05 CV11 TI30 CI12 IP95 1 RC05 CC02 CS24 JS59 CS73 64 TI45 RP84 TP86 RP93 RP87 DL19 BL02 RB10 7 RI58 CS42 DS40 RS42 CC04 DI30 RI03 JF50 RP96 RP94 JF53 CP95 TL33 +5V UP CP86 RP86 RL56 RL58 Video JF49 CL34 JF51 RR86 RI16 RX57 32 CV13 JI53 JI52 CX47 CX03 RX03 CS31 JS56 RI33 RP82 DP85 TL59 RL02 CL59 U CI15 CI05 Timer RL55 U- CL36 CL33 TL52 RL54 TL32 CAD-REF: 10516550.0A RL03 BL01 RL39 TL02 TL55 DL77 CV24 CV22 CV20 TX45 RX47 CS47 RV18 JI54 RL74 RL45 CI03 RL19 RL31 CL39 CL35 TP82 RL04 HOR CL31 1 CI04 RL09 RL46 RL32 RL33 3 5V DST RI07 CI47 CI02 21 CS16 33 01 4 RP81 JF52 17 RX59 JX51 IV LL32 TL31 6 DL14 JL71 CI10 RI32 13 9 JS58 RL73 1 10 CH01 CI43 RL05 TL34 RX05 JX58 RH20 DL73 TL14 3 RS62 LI10 2 1 LS61 2 CS15 JH51 RH10 DL13 RL15 9 LL26 E 7 CX01 RH05 3 RX43 BX02 TX15 20 RX22 P N JS70 DX01 RH02 JH06 4 RL06 C 8 5 LL05 RL72 6 7 8 21 RX02 CX02 JS69 JF56 JF55 BF01 5 RH03 RF11 B 3 M CS68 RX56 RS63 RL71 VERT 1 RS51 CH05 TL51 RL51 CL52 DL21 CS59 CH06 BX01 CS13 CS12 K A G L RX24 CF12 K RX01 RL12 RF06 BX50 J CI53 RL49 DL48 RF13 9 6 4 TF01 RF03 V RX28 LS63 CF11 1 LS62 IF01 RL42 LL22 DL22 9 RL48 CL41 TL42 JH54 TL41 RX27 RL70 RL41 Z RL40 RF01 CS70 H CF01 RS66 CS71 RS67 G CF02 RS50 F E DL42 RF02 D E C B RF12 C B A RP38 C 5 IP20 D RP35 E F G DP62 H LR30 JS40 JS42 CR80 BS91 JS99 RS90 CR30 RR10 TR23 CR32 RR52 CR33 BS90 CR23 32 IR02 K JR54 RR47 RR46 1 BR01 CR15 RR06 RR12 RR22 CR09 CR22 TR15 RR09 RR16 RR14 RR05 CR07 CR24 RR17 JR51 TR20 DR22 L CR08 DR24 17 DR05 CR06 CR05 RR20 CR04 CR03 RR18 LR02 J RS91 JX57 CV31 CR41 RR32 RR33 RR08 01 IR JR52 1 RP71 RP69 JS51 RV13 CV14 RV08 LI50 RR69 CR98 16 TP72 CP61 IP61 RP66 DP63 DP40 DP60 RP60 DP19 DP18 TP21 RP68 TP67 RR87 RR03 DR21 RR01 CR12 1 80 RP62 DP61 RP26 RP22 RP21 DP24 RP23 RP25 CP23 1 1 RR21 LR34 RP64 DP01 DP02 RP27 TP57 RP09 RP53 DP70 DP03 DP04 DP58 RP24 DP16 RR53 CS94 BS80 CS95 TR40 RR02 RP73 1 5 IR03 RR43 RR41 DP67 RP61 RR49 JR53 B CP38 1 RR96 RR30 RR44 RR42 JP45 DP17 RP30 DP54 RP31 CP56 RP58 RP55 TP42 DP52 RP41 RP42 DP42 RP45 CP59 TP58 RP98 TP59 A DP56 DP57 RP83 RP40 TP44 DP66 TP71 RP57 JP44 RP56 TP50 RP47 RP48 RP59 RR95 JR64 FP01 CP10 E RR55 RR40 CR96 RR93 RR31 1 LR31 CR11 BP01 DP09 CR95 CP57 RP43 CR93 JX43 RR48 CS92 CS93 JX42 JX44 TR60 RR68 CR20 DP50 C RR91 RR94 13 LP01 2 RR80 CR90 CR91 14 JP51 B RR64 RR90 CR21 16 15 RR56 RR81 RP06 RP01 17 JR58 RV10 CR01 18 BV01 JV55 JR59 RR60 BP15 CS81 JV56 1 DV09 RR62 RR66 19 21 CV07 RP15 JP15 RS95 JS43 CV06 6 CR97 CR92 RP16 CI60 JI57 CR94 RP17 3 2 1 RP28 RP18 RI64 RR63 RP14 TP15 CP12 RP78 TI60 JR66 CP92 JP14 9 RP08 8 6 RP92 RP12 RP13 4 5 LP50 3 RS98 CV05 CI72 RP90 TP14 0 JI58 03VC 2 CP89 RV12 RS01 -UA JR63 RP77 RP70 RP75 TP75 RP72 RP11 1 JR62 TP76 RP74 IP87 RI63 RI61 JR65 4 3 CI59 JP71 JP70 RP89 JL80 JL81 RP88 7 RP91 +UA TP90 USYS JL82 JP46 DP89 1 2 3 JP47 5 TR13 RR15 M ICC17 First issue 07 / 98 10 cm 5 cm 10 cm 10 cm www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr About this manual This document is common to several television models. Therefore, certain functions or settings may not apply to the model you have purchased The position of the ON/OFF switch differs depending on the model. It may be located on the front or on the right-hand side of your set (see the drawing inside the cover page of your manual). About safety To ensure your own safety and safe operation of the equipment, observe the following instructions thoroughly. TV sets require sufficient ventilation to prevent their components from overheating, which will cause failure. Do not block the ventilation openings at the rear. If you place your TV set in a special piece of furniture, make sure there is enough space for unhindered air circulation. Do not place the TV set in the close vicinity of a heater. The TV set has been designed for use in dry rooms. Should you use it, in exceptional circumstances in the open air (example: on the balcony, in the veranda or tent), you must absolutely protect it against moisture (dew, rain, splash water). Before switching on a cold TV set in a warm room, you should wait until any condensation in the screen has dried by itself. Maximum ambient temperature: 35°C Maximum humidity: 85% By the end of your TV evening or when away from home for a longer period, we recommend that you turn off the TV set with the On/Off-switch. Even when the On/Off-switch is in the Off-position, your TV set is not fully disconnected from the mains. To disconnect the set completely, the mains plug must be pulled out. The mains plug must be easily accessible. In the following cases, we recommend that you pull out the mains connector: 1. During a thunderstorm. In such a case, it is advisable that you also disconnect the TV set from the aerial socket. 2. When odour or smoke emanates from the set. Never attempt to open your TV set yourself. Further information: The TV set shielding is sufficient to prevent X-radiation to the exterior. Any operation performed by a non skilled person, change of high voltage or replacement of the picture tube by a model not complying with the manufacturer specification are likely to cause considerable increase in X-radiation. A TV set modified in such a way no longer complies with the manufacturers’ specification and must not be used. About cleaning The screen is to be cleaned with liquid glass cleaners. : Never use abrasive products. : Clean the cabinet with a soft cloth soaked with neutral cleaner. Do not use solvents, such as white spirit or alcohol-based cleaning products since they may damage your television. : At regular intervals, clean the ventilation grids at the rear of the TV set. About degaussing The terrestrial magnetic field may have an influence on your TV set. This influence is revealed by the coloured spots, which appear on the screen. Should this be the case: : Turn the equipment off by means of the On/Off-switch. : Wait about one hour before switching the set on again. This procedure performs automatic degaussing of the screen. Should there still be coloured spots on the screen, repeat the operation. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 1 GB About the switch Contents GB Using the remote control and fitting the batteries. How to call up a menu and how to select a function, a setting or an option. About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About degaussing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Basic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Navigation principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Calling up the Installation main menu . . . 5 Calling up the Settings summary . . . . . . . 5 Page Instructions for Use Installation Page 4 Daily viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Picture Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 List of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Selecting Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Scrolling the Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Audio-visual (AV) Programmes . . . . . . 15 Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Muting the Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Zoom (16/9 models only) . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Calling up a Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Displaying Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Navigating within the Menus . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Television Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Installing your television for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Switching Off the Television . . . . . . . . . 15 Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Automatic installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Standard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Programme organisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Other Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Manual programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Other Possibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Personal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier . . . . 17 Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 2 5 Basic connections Basic connections The mains plug (1) supplies power to the television. The television must only be plugged in to a 220-240 V - 50 Hz power supply. It must never be plugged in to a DC source. If the plug comes away from the lead, never attempt to plug it in: this could cause electrocution. Continental Europe If you connect an appliance to the aerial jack, you must give it a channel number. To do this, switch on the appliance, then use the television to find the modulator channel (see the appliance manual). Now give it a programme number and memorise it (see Manual Programming of channels). Then, when you wish to use the appliance, simply select its programme number on the television. This procedure is not required for VCR’s not equipped with a modulator. GB The aerial socket (2), located on the rear of the television, can be used to connect an external aerial or other appliance equipped with a modulator such as a VCR, satellite receiver, etc. United Kingdom The plug is fitted with a fuse which protects your television. If your television does not work, the fuse may be blown. In this case, replace it with an identical 5 Amp ASTA or lr BSI (BS 1362) certified fuse. $ The SCART socket AV1 (3), located on the rear of the television, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder (VHS, 8 mm), a Canal+ decoder, a video games console or RGB-signal emitting appliances. The SCART socket AV2 (3), located on the rear of the television, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder (VHS, 8 mm, S-VHS or Hi-8). Note: the mains lead of your television is fitted with a moulded plug. This lead contains all the safety equipment, so you are advised when replacing it not to use a non-specific commercially-available model. We strongly recommend the use of this type of connection, which gives a better picture quality. To use the peripheral appliance that you have connected, press the AV key on your remote control (press once to select AV1; twice to select AV2; three times for AV3: see ”Other Connections”). This selection is automatic for some appliances. Pressing “”play” on a VCR, or switching on a satellite receiver connected to AV1 or AV2 will automatically switch on your television. When you stop the VCR, if you have not changed channels while watching the VCR, the television automatically switches back to the channel you were watching beforehand. If the television has been switched on from the VCR, it switches to standby when the VCR is switched off. The television automatically switches to 16/9 format if the connected appliance delivers the corresponding signal. 2 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 3 Remote control Remote control Display of channel, time, sound (yellow This key is active only when using the Teletext (blue key) button) (and zoom for models with zoom) Call up programme list Standby GB (green button) Call up Teletext / Toptext / Fastext function (purple button) Reminder of picture preferences (red button) Right/Left Selection within menus and Zoom Function (for models with this function) Confirm an action or validate a menu option Go to adjustment function MENU To leave a menu or Teletext Move Up/Down in menus Volume adjustment Change programme Sound mute 8 Go to programmes and enter numerical values in menus Selecting appliances connected to the television (AV1, AV2 ...) For programme numbers higher than 10, press the 0 key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now use the number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit. The red, green, yellow and blue keys are also used for the Teletext. Please respect the environment! Before throwing any batteries away, consult your distributor who may be able to take them back for specific recycling. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 4 Navigation principles Navigation principles Calling up the Installation main menu INSTALLATION MAIN MENU If there is no menu displayed on the screen, key on the remote press and hold the control. The settings SUMMARY is displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU which you can use to operate your television. Exit Manual programming Auto installation GB Programme organisation Personal settings Calling up the Settings summary SUMMARY Press and release the key on the remote control to display the list of menus available for using your television functions or adjusting your television Exit Teletext Picture Sound Calling up a Menu List Select the menu you wish using the Up/Down key to validate.. keys. Press the Time Preferences Navigating within the Menus Use the Up/Down keys 1 to select a line. Use the Left/Right keys 2 to: - Increase or decrease a value: for example: Fine tuning - Select an option: Aerial for example: Reception Cable Reception - Activate or deactivate an option: for example: Decoder - Access a sub-menu: for example: Picture preferences You can use the 3 MANUAL PROGRAMMING Return Standard Reception Autosearch Fine tuning Store on PR number Name Decoder External sound path EURO BG Cable CH- ----- Enter channel number or start autosearch with < or >. key to: - Activate or deactivate an option: for example: Decoder - Access a sub-menu: for example: Picture preferences - Validate an action: for example: Store on PR number Use the 4 key to exit a menu. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 5 Installing your television for the first time Installing your television for the first time First plug the television into a mains power outlet and to the external aerial or a cable network, then switch on using located on the front or the side of your set. the ON/OFF switch When you switch on your television for the first time, the language selection menu* is displayed (Fig. 1). If this does key on the television until this menu appears. not happen, set the television to standby then press and hold the GB Installation Instructions (start) 1. Use the Up/Down keys to select the language in which you wish the menus to be displayed. . 2. Then validate using 3. A list of countries* is now displayed (Fig. 2). Select the country in which you live, or the country from which you wish to receive the broadcasts if you live in a border area. . 4. Then validate using 5. A welcome message is displayed. 6. Run the automatic installation sequence . using 7. A message appears to inform you that automatic installation has started (Fig. 3). Wait for a few minutes. A new message will inform you when automatic installation is completed. 8. If you wish to check or modify the channel and see the organisation, press Programme organisation chapter. If you do not wish to modify the channel organisation, you can exit the menu by then watch the channel of pressing your choice. Choose the desired channel using the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the / keys. If you have a decoder, see the Manual programming chapter. Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the country you have selected. See the Manual channel programming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, read the Automatic channel installation chapter to install any channels not found. (Fig. 1) English Français Deutsch Italiano Español Português Nederlands Svenska Dansk Norwisch (Fig. 2) OK COUNTRY SELECTION Exit United Kingdom Eire France Germany Italy Spain Portugal Holland Belgium and Luxembourg Switzerland Austria Sweden Denmark Norway Other Select your country and press OK (Fig. 3) SEARCHING *The list of languages and countries may vary from one model to another. Installation Instructions (end) AUTO INSTALLATION 003 STATIONS FOUND Searching for TV stations. Please wait. To cancel press EXIT. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 6 Automatic installation Automatic installation The Automatic installation function is useful if you have to go through the installation procedure again, such as when moving house. This function deletes all previously memorised programmes. To install a new channel, you should use the Manual programming function. Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the selected country, so see the Manual programming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, if you have not found certain channels, select Other instead of a country name in the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu, then run automatic installation again. INSTALLATION MAIN MENU 1. Press and hold the key on the remote control to display the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU (The SUMMARY appears first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU). 2. Select the Auto installation line. 3. Validate using Exit Manual programming Auto installation Programme organisation Personal settings . A message will inform you that Automatic installation has begun. Wait for a few minutes. A new message will inform you when Automatic installation is completed. SEARCHING If you wish to check or reorganize your channel key and see the display, press the Programme organisation chapter. AUTO INSTALLATION If you do not wish to reorganize your programmes, you can exit this menu by , then watch the programme of pressing your choice. Choose the desired programme using the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the / keys. 003 STATIONS FOUND Searching for TV stations. Please wait. To cancel press EXIT. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 7 GB Before running AUTO INSTALLATION, check the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu to ensure that the country displayed is correct. Programme organisation Programme organisation During automatic installation, your television will search for the channel name and assign it a programme number according to the selected country. You can use the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION menu to name any channel name not found, to change the order in which the channels are displayed, or to delete channels for which reception is too poor. Follow the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below. GB If you wish to access the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION, menu thereafter, first press and hold key on the remote control to the display the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU (the SUMMARY is displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU) then select Programme . organisation and validate using - To delete a programme for which reception is too poor: 1. Select the line marked Select program. / or Left/Right keys to list 2. Use the your channels. 3. When you get to a channel you wish to delete, select the line marked Delete program. to delete the programme. 4. Press . 5. .Validate using - To organize your channels to suit you: 1. Select the line marked Select program.. 2. Use the / or Left/Right keys and the programmes logos to find the programme to which you wish to give the No.1. Its present number appears on the line marked Select program.. 3. Select the line marked Swap with PR. 4. Enter 01. . The two programmes swap 5. Press position and the desired programme becomes N°1. 6. Repeat the above procedure for the other channels. INSTALLATION MAIN MENU Exit Manual programming Auto installation Programme organisation Personal settings PROGRAMME ORGANISATION Return Select program. Swap with PR. Change pr. name Delete program. 13 -EURO 13 MTV FR2 TF1 EURO CH40 CC01 ARTE CART ---ARD Select programme number using PR-/PR+ or </> or 0 to 9 keys. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. - To name your channels: 1. Select the line marked Change pr. name 2. Select the character you wish to modify using the Left/Right keys. 3. Use the and keys to display the letter you require. The name you have entered will be memorised when you move to another line or exit the menu. If you wish to change the order in which your programmes are displayed or if you wish to name other programmes, repeat the procedures described above. When you have finished organizing the . programmes, exit the menu using www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Manual programming Manual programming The manual installation function is useful if some programmes have not been installed even after AUTOMATIC INSTALLATION. , the SUMMARY is 1. Press and hold displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU. 2. Select the line marked Manual programming. . 3. Display the menu using 4. Now continue by following the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below. Standard : Select the standard using Left/Right keys that corresponds to your country from the list of standards. The number of standards proposed will differ from one model to another. France for France and Luxemburg DKK’ eg. for Eastern Europe and the Middle-East I for the United Kingdom and Ireland Euro BG for Western Europe INSTALLATION MAIN MENU Exit Manual programming GB Auto installation Programme organisation Personal settings MANUAL PROGRAMMING Return Standard Reception Autosearch Fine tuning Store on PR number Name Decoder External sound path EURO BG Cable CH- ----- Reception : Your television can pick up channels either via Enter channel number or start an aerial (RF channels) or via a cable network. autosearch with < or >. Certain cable networks use the same frequencies as the RF channels. If this is the case, you must select Aerial instead of Cable. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous Autosearch : Enter the programme number if you know it. If not, search using the Left/Right keys. Your television will stop at the first channel it tunes into. If you wish to memorize it, go to the line marked Store on PR number. If not, resume the search using the Left/Right keys. Fine tuning : You can use this to improve the picture if the transmitter frequency is out of adjustment. Use the Left/Right keys to obtain the best possible picture and sound. Store on PR number : . Enter the programme number you wish to give the channel (e.g.: 01 for BBC1). Memorise using Name : If the station has been identified by the transmitter, its name will be inscribed automatically. You can change the proposed name or enter it if it has not already been identified. Select the character you wish to modify using the Left/Right keys. Use the or keys to display the character you desire. Decoder : Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box if the channel is coded and if a decoder is connected to the AV1 jack. External sound path : Switch on your decoder. If the sound is coded or if you have no sound, activate or deactivate the box as required using the Left/Right keys. Once you have made all the adjustments you wish to a programme, go to Store on PR number and press to memorise these. Then move on to the next channel. Once you have completed your Manual Programming, exit the menu using . www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 9 Personal settings Personal settings GB 1. Press and hold the key: the SUMMARY is displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU. 2. Select the line marked Personal settings. INSTALLATION MAIN MENU Exit Manual programming 3. Display the menu using . 4. Continue by following the messages at the bottom of the screen. Auto installation For further details, read the information below. Personal settings Menu language : Select the language in which the menus are to be displayed. PERSONAL SETTINGS Country : Indicate the country in which you are if you wish to rerun Automatic Programming. For cable networks, if certain channels have not been found, select Other instead of the country name before running automatic installation again. You may find that the characters of certain teletext languages are inaccessible for the selected country. Auto volume level : This is a sound control function which aims to equalise the volume level between different channels, and between different programmes on the same channel. Activate or deactivate the auto volume level as required. Programme organisation Return Menu language English Country UK Auto volume level AV1 name AV2 name AV3 name VCR ---CAMC Prog. to be used for reference time 06 Select a station from which you want to get the reference time. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. On models equipped with Virtual Dolby Surround, this function remains inactive if Dolby Virtual has been selected in the SOUND menu (see Volume Control). AV1, AV2, AV3 name : Use these to give a name to each of your audio-visual programmes. Select the character you wish to modify using the Left/Right keys. or keys to display the desired Use the character. Prog. to be used for reference time : key or to use To display the time using the the alarm function, the television clock must be set to the correct time. Select the line marked Prog. to be used for reference time and select a channel which broadcasts teletext. The time is set automatically and is displayed after the channel number. Exit the menu using . www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 10 13:15 Preferences Preferences 1. Display the SUMMARY by pressing and releasing the key on the remote control . 2. Select the line marked Preferences. . 3. Display the menu using Show program. number : If you wish to permanently display the number of the programme you are watching, tick the box using the Left/Right keys. Press the Left/Right keys again to deactivate this function. PREFERENCES Return Show program. number AV2 video input AV3 video input Format control Picture preferences GB Make your choice from the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Video S-Video Auto AV2 video input : Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV2 SCART socket (Video or S-Video). AV3 video input : Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV3 sockets (these sockets are located on the front or the side of the television). Format control : Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired picture format: Auto : if the transmitter (for 16/9 format TV’s) or the appliance connected to one of the peripheral jacks delivers the switching signal, the television automatically adapts to the transmitted picture format. 16/9 : manually selects widescreen picture format. 4/3 : manually selects this picture format. If you have selected 16/9 or 4/3, the television will switch back to Auto when you change channels or you switch off. Picture preferences : To access the PICTURE PREFERENCES . menu, press If you wish, you can personalize certain picture settings. Select and set the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Settings : Select Standard or Personal. Standard corresponds to the factory settings. Personal corresponds to the settings that you have entered yourself. The lines Brightness, Colour and Contrast are displayed only if you have selected Personal on the Settings line. Select each line one after the other and enter your required settings. You can recall these picture settings by pressing the red key on the remote control. . Exit the menu using PICTURE PREFERENCES Return Settings Brightness Colour Contrast Personal Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 11 Daily viewing Daily viewing Picture Adjustment GB Display the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select Picture. Validate . The PICTURE menu is displayed. using Select and set the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Brightness, Colour, Contrast, Sharpness: Select each of these lines one after the other and set as required. Contrast expand : Select this line then choose the desired Contrast expand setting (High or Low). Tone : Select this line then choose the desired colour tone (Warm, Neutral or Cold). Exit the menu using . PICTURE Return Brightness Colour Contrast Sharpness Neutral Cold Contrast expand Tone Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. Sound Settings Display the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select the line marked . The SOUND menu Sound. Validate using is displayed. Select and set the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Sound type : The choices available to you depend on your television model and the broadcast. Stereo, Dual or NICAM reception and the corresponding choices are only available on Stereo or NICAM Stereo televisions. Select this line, then select the type of sound you desire. Sound mode : Select this line, then choose the desired mode using the Left/Right keys. The choices available to you depend on your television model and the type of sound. Magic and Dolby Virtual modes are only available in stereo on TV’s equipped with Virtual Dolby Surround. Stereo wide is only available on Stereo or Nicam televisions not equipped with Virtual Dolby Surround. Balance L/R : Select this line, then balance the sound between the Left and Right loudspeakers. Treble, Bass : Select each of these lines and adjust to suit you. Surround effect : This line appears only if you have selected Dolby Virtual on the Sound mode line. Select this line and adjust the surround effect to suit you. Exit the menu using . SOUND Return Automatic Normal Sound type Sound mode Balance L/R Treble Bass Surround effect Broadcast mono stereo dual NICAM-3 AV Mode Choice automatic - mono mono - stereo sound 1 - sound 2 sound 1 - sound 2 - sound 3 stereo - sound 1 - sound 2 Effect Normal : reproduces the original sound ( mono or stereo). Wide : gives a stereo effect on mono sounds. Stereo wide : accentuates the stereo effect. Magic : accentuates the stereo effects and adds echo. Dolby Virtual : Virtual Dolby Surround. Virtual Surround Dolby is based on Dolby Pro Logic decoding for the reproduction of the Left, Right, Centre and Virtual Surround sound channels using two loudspeakers. “”Dolby”, “”Pro Logic” and the double -D symbol are trademarks of the Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 12 Daily viewing Time Display the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select the line marked . The TIME menu is Time. Validate using displayed. Sleep timer : Use the Left/Right keys to choose how long you wish to view before the television switches off. The television will switch off automatically at the end of this period. To cancel, set to 00:00. One minute before switching off, a message will inform you that the television is about to go off. If you wish to keep it on, press any key on the remote control or the local keyboard. The television switches to Child lock mode after an automatic stop. It can only be switched on again from the remote control. TIME Return Sleep timer 00 : 00 Current time 11 : 28 Wake-up timer Wake-up time Programme number Daily 07 : 07 01 BBC1 GB You can use this menu to switch your television on or off automatically at a set time. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. Current time : The current time is given by the Teletext (see PERSONAL SETTINGS menu). You can also set the time manually using the number keys (0 to 9) on your remote control. Wake-up timer : If you wish to be woken up by your television on the channel of your choice, you must first set the television clock to the correct time (see above). Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box and display the Wake-up timer menu. The lines Wake-up time, Programme number and Daily only appear if you have ticked the box on the line marked Wake-up timer. Wake-up time : Use the number keys (0 to 9) on the remote control to set the time at which you wish to be woken. Programme number : Select the programme you wish to be woken by. Daily : Tick this box if you wish to be awakened at this time every day. . Exit the menu using Set the television to standby using the key on the remote control. The red indicator light on the television flashes. The television will come on automatically at the programmed time and will go off one hour later if you do not use the remote control. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 13 Daily viewing List of Channels GB This list contains up to 10 pages. The number of pages depends on the number of programmes memorized. For each programme, the list indicates the station name or type and the programme number. The 3 AV programmes are listed on page 11. To display the list, press the key on the remote control or key on the remote control. Select the Display the SUMMARY using the . line marked List. Validate using The page displayed is the page containing the programme you are watching. It is identified in the list by the symbol TV. To display the next page, press the Right key. To display the previous page, press the Left key. If you wish to watch one of the programmes on the page displayed: Enter the last digit of the programme number (e.g. for 25 simply enter 5) on the remote control. The list disappears and your programme is selected. Or, - Select the programme using the Up/Down keys. . - Validate using . - Exit the menu using www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 14 LIST Exit 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 BBC 1 BBC 2 FR 3 CC19 ARTE M6 CNN PREM EURO TV Page -/+ Programme: 0 - 9 Daily viewing Selecting Programmes GB For channels 1 to 9, press the number key corresponding to the desired channel on the remote control. For programme numbers higher than 10, press the key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now use the number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit. If you press while ”- -” is already displayed, the display returns to 0- , in which case you can only select programmes 1 to 9. Scrolling the Programmes You can scroll through the programmes using the / keys. Audio-visual (AV) Programmes Press the key to call the last audio-visual (AV) programme watched. Press repeatedly to scroll the audio-visual (AV) programmes on the screen. Volume Control Use the volume +/- keys to increase or decrease the volume. Muting the Sound Press the key to mute the sound. Press again to restore the sound. Zoom (16/9 models only) This function is useful for 4/3 or letterbox pictures (black bands at the top and bottom of the screen). Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired zoom position: ZOOM 0: 4/3 picture (black bands at the sides). FULL SCREEN: for a 4/3 picture that fills the screen. ZOOM 1: for letterbox pictures. Displaying Information Press the of sound. key to display the following information on the screen: channel number and name, time, zoom, type Television Lock You can use this function to prevent anyone from switching on the television using the buttons on the television set. The buttons on the television set are locked in the following cases: - If you switch off the set by pressing and holding the key on the remote control for more than 3 seconds, - After a programmed stop, - If the television is set to standby when the alarm has been set. When the television is locked the red power will be light flashing. The television can now only be operated from the remote control. To release the lock, press any number key on the remote control. Switching Off the Television To switch off the television, press the Standby key on the remote control or press the ON/OFF switch on the television set. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 15 Teletext Teletext GB Certain channels broadcast an electronic news page service with a range of different information services. The presentation and use of the Teletext differ from one country to another and from one programme to another (Teletext, Fastext or Toptext). Press the key to display the Teletext Index (page 100). A message will inform you if the programme you are watching has no Teletext service. To call up a page: Enter the 3 digits of the page number you wish to consult (for example, 150 or 170). After a moment, the page appears. Use the Left/Right keys to consult the next or the previous page. Standard Functions Rolling pages: Some information is displayed over several sub-pages. It is scrolled on your screen as it is received. . Press again to continue To stop scrolling, select STOP using the Up/Down keys and validate using scrolling. Masked text: To reveal a hidden answer (for example in a quiz programme), select ??? using the Up/Down keys and validate . Press again to hide the answers. using Zoom : Select ZOOM using the Up/Down keys then press the key once to magnify the top of the screen, twice to magnify the bottom of the screen (the page will scroll from top to bottom) and a third time to return to the normal display. Display: You can superpose the Teletext page over the TV picture. To do this, select MIX using the Up/Down keys then validate by pressing the key. Press again to return to the normal display. Sub-code: You can use this to access a sub-page directly. Select “- - - -” using the Up/Down keys. Then enter the four digits of the required sub-page number. Certain programmes have Alarm pages that you can set to appear at the time you require. For example: for 15h30 enter 1530 as the sub-page number then press . You must of course leave the television on the programme which is to transmit the Alarm page. Index: To call up the index page, select 100 using the Up/Down keys then validate using . Direct access: You can use the yellow and blue keys to directly access the pages indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen. Fastext functions: If the Teletext you receive is Fastext, a sub-menu at the bottom of the screen appears which you can use to select from the 4 headings according to its colour. To select a heading, press the key of the corresponding colour. Toptext functions: If the Teletext you receive is TOPtext, the pages are arranged into headings and sub-headings by subject. You can select the first page of a heading directly by pressing the blue key, or the first page of a sub-heading by pressing the yellow key. Other functions: With certain Teletext channels, it is possible to have sub-titles overlaid on the screen for certain broadcasts as well as certain news flash updates. The corresponding page number is indicated in the Telextext index. Once you have found the page, the sub-title or the news flash will be overlaid onto the TV picture. key. The navigation status bar disappears after a few seconds. To display it again, press the or . To exit Teletext, press www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 16 Other Connections Other Connections The CINCH Video and Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connect a VHS or 8mm camcorder. The S and CINCH Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connect a S-VHS or Hi-8 camcorder. GB To use the appliance you have connected, press the key several times until the AV3 programme is selected on the screen. When you switch off the connected appliance, the television will remain on the AV3 programme and you must use the numerical keys on the remote control to select a programme. * on models equipped with this function The headphone socket (2)* is provided to connect a headphone or earphones. Connecting headphones mute the sound from the television loudspeakers. Other Possibilities Copying a cassette: Plug the VCR you wish to record to into the SCART socket AV2. Plug the appliance you wish to copy from as follows: into the peripheral jack AV1 for a VCR; into the CINCH AV3 jacks for a camcorder (see table below). RECORD PLAY Appliance * on models equipped with this function SCART Socket Appliance SCART Socket CALL PROGRAMME Peripheral AV1 VCR ou Camcorder AV2 AV1 Cinches or S-Video AV3 VCR ou Camcorder AV2 AV3 VCR Camcorder Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier If you wish to connect a HiFi or AV amplifier, plug it into the peripheral jack AV2 using a SCART-CINCH type lead. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 17 MANUEL D’UTILISATION - BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG - MANUALE DI UTILIZZAZIONE - USER MANUAL MANUAL DE UTILIZACIÓN - GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING - BRUKSANGVISNING %(7-(1,1*69(-/('1,1* - FOLHETO DE UTILIZAÇÃO www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 0 ( 7 ( : ( 10 cm 5 cm 10 cm 10 cm www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr About this manual This document is common to several television models. Therefore, certain functions or settings may not apply to the model you have purchased The position of the ON/OFF switch differs depending on the model. It may be located on the front or on the right-hand side of your set (see the drawing inside the cover page of your manual). About safety To ensure your own safety and safe operation of the equipment, observe the following instructions thoroughly. TV sets require sufficient ventilation to prevent their components from overheating, which will cause failure. Do not block the ventilation openings at the rear. If you place your TV set in a special piece of furniture, make sure there is enough space for unhindered air circulation. Do not place the TV set in the close vicinity of a heater. The TV set has been designed for use in dry rooms. Should you use it, in exceptional circumstances in the open air (example: on the balcony, in the veranda or tent), you must absolutely protect it against moisture (dew, rain, splash water). Before switching on a cold TV set in a warm room, you should wait until any condensation in the screen has dried by itself. Maximum ambient temperature: 35°C Maximum humidity: 85% By the end of your TV evening or when away from home for a longer period, we recommend that you turn off the TV set with the On/Off-switch. Even when the On/Off-switch is in the Off-position, your TV set is not fully disconnected from the mains. To disconnect the set completely, the mains plug must be pulled out. The mains plug must be easily accessible. In the following cases, we recommend that you pull out the mains connector: 1. During a thunderstorm. In such a case, it is advisable that you also disconnect the TV set from the aerial socket. 2. When odour or smoke emanates from the set. Never attempt to open your TV set yourself. Further information: The TV set shielding is sufficient to prevent X-radiation to the exterior. Any operation performed by a non skilled person, change of high voltage or replacement of the picture tube by a model not complying with the manufacturer specification are likely to cause considerable increase in X-radiation. A TV set modified in such a way no longer complies with the manufacturers’ specification and must not be used. About cleaning The screen is to be cleaned with liquid glass cleaners. : Never use abrasive products. : Clean the cabinet with a soft cloth soaked with neutral cleaner. Do not use solvents, such as white spirit or alcohol-based cleaning products since they may damage your television. : At regular intervals, clean the ventilation grids at the rear of the TV set. About degaussing The terrestrial magnetic field may have an influence on your TV set. This influence is revealed by the coloured spots, which appear on the screen. Should this be the case: : Turn the equipment off by means of the On/Off-switch. : Wait about one hour before switching the set on again. This procedure performs automatic degaussing of the screen. Should there still be coloured spots on the screen, repeat the operation. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 1 GB About the switch Contents GB Using the remote control and fitting the batteries. How to call up a menu and how to select a function, a setting or an option. About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About degaussing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Basic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Navigation principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Calling up the Installation main menu . . . 5 Calling up the Settings summary . . . . . . . 5 Page Instructions for Use Installation Page 4 Daily viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Picture Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 List of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Selecting Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Scrolling the Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Audio-visual (AV) Programmes . . . . . . 15 Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Muting the Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Zoom (16/9 models only) . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Calling up a Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Displaying Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Navigating within the Menus . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Television Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Installing your television for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Switching Off the Television . . . . . . . . . 15 Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Automatic installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Standard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Programme organisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Other Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Manual programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Other Possibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Personal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier . . . . 17 Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 2 5 Basic connections Basic connections The mains plug (1) supplies power to the television. The television must only be plugged in to a 220-240 V - 50 Hz power supply. It must never be plugged in to a DC source. If the plug comes away from the lead, never attempt to plug it in: this could cause electrocution. Continental Europe If you connect an appliance to the aerial jack, you must give it a channel number. To do this, switch on the appliance, then use the television to find the modulator channel (see the appliance manual). Now give it a programme number and memorise it (see Manual Programming of channels). Then, when you wish to use the appliance, simply select its programme number on the television. This procedure is not required for VCR’s not equipped with a modulator. GB The aerial socket (2), located on the rear of the television, can be used to connect an external aerial or other appliance equipped with a modulator such as a VCR, satellite receiver, etc. United Kingdom The plug is fitted with a fuse which protects your television. If your television does not work, the fuse may be blown. In this case, replace it with an identical 5 Amp ASTA or lr BSI (BS 1362) certified fuse. $ The SCART socket AV1 (3), located on the rear of the television, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder (VHS, 8 mm), a Canal+ decoder, a video games console or RGB-signal emitting appliances. The SCART socket AV2 (3), located on the rear of the television, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder (VHS, 8 mm, S-VHS or Hi-8). Note: the mains lead of your television is fitted with a moulded plug. This lead contains all the safety equipment, so you are advised when replacing it not to use a non-specific commercially-available model. We strongly recommend the use of this type of connection, which gives a better picture quality. To use the peripheral appliance that you have connected, press the AV key on your remote control (press once to select AV1; twice to select AV2; three times for AV3: see ”Other Connections”). This selection is automatic for some appliances. Pressing “”play” on a VCR, or switching on a satellite receiver connected to AV1 or AV2 will automatically switch on your television. When you stop the VCR, if you have not changed channels while watching the VCR, the television automatically switches back to the channel you were watching beforehand. If the television has been switched on from the VCR, it switches to standby when the VCR is switched off. The television automatically switches to 16/9 format if the connected appliance delivers the corresponding signal. 2 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 3 Remote control Remote control Display of channel, time, sound (yellow This key is active only when using the Teletext (blue key) button) (and zoom for models with zoom) Call up programme list Standby GB (green button) Call up Teletext / Toptext / Fastext function (purple button) Reminder of picture preferences (red button) Right/Left Selection within menus and Zoom Function (for models with this function) Confirm an action or validate a menu option Go to adjustment function MENU To leave a menu or Teletext Move Up/Down in menus Volume adjustment Change programme Sound mute 8 Go to programmes and enter numerical values in menus Selecting appliances connected to the television (AV1, AV2 ...) For programme numbers higher than 10, press the 0 key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now use the number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit. The red, green, yellow and blue keys are also used for the Teletext. Please respect the environment! Before throwing any batteries away, consult your distributor who may be able to take them back for specific recycling. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 4 Navigation principles Navigation principles Calling up the Installation main menu INSTALLATION MAIN MENU If there is no menu displayed on the screen, key on the remote press and hold the control. The settings SUMMARY is displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU which you can use to operate your television. Exit Manual programming Auto installation GB Programme organisation Personal settings Calling up the Settings summary SUMMARY Press and release the key on the remote control to display the list of menus available for using your television functions or adjusting your television Exit Teletext Picture Sound Calling up a Menu List Select the menu you wish using the Up/Down key to validate.. keys. Press the Time Preferences Navigating within the Menus Use the Up/Down keys 1 to select a line. Use the Left/Right keys 2 to: - Increase or decrease a value: for example: Fine tuning - Select an option: Aerial for example: Reception Cable Reception - Activate or deactivate an option: for example: Decoder - Access a sub-menu: for example: Picture preferences You can use the 3 MANUAL PROGRAMMING Return Standard Reception Autosearch Fine tuning Store on PR number Name Decoder External sound path EURO BG Cable CH- ----- Enter channel number or start autosearch with < or >. key to: - Activate or deactivate an option: for example: Decoder - Access a sub-menu: for example: Picture preferences - Validate an action: for example: Store on PR number Use the 4 key to exit a menu. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 5 Installing your television for the first time Installing your television for the first time First plug the television into a mains power outlet and to the external aerial or a cable network, then switch on using located on the front or the side of your set. the ON/OFF switch When you switch on your television for the first time, the language selection menu* is displayed (Fig. 1). If this does key on the television until this menu appears. not happen, set the television to standby then press and hold the GB Installation Instructions (start) 1. Use the Up/Down keys to select the language in which you wish the menus to be displayed. . 2. Then validate using 3. A list of countries* is now displayed (Fig. 2). Select the country in which you live, or the country from which you wish to receive the broadcasts if you live in a border area. . 4. Then validate using 5. A welcome message is displayed. 6. Run the automatic installation sequence . using 7. A message appears to inform you that automatic installation has started (Fig. 3). Wait for a few minutes. A new message will inform you when automatic installation is completed. 8. If you wish to check or modify the channel and see the organisation, press Programme organisation chapter. If you do not wish to modify the channel organisation, you can exit the menu by then watch the channel of pressing your choice. Choose the desired channel using the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the / keys. If you have a decoder, see the Manual programming chapter. Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the country you have selected. See the Manual channel programming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, read the Automatic channel installation chapter to install any channels not found. (Fig. 1) English Français Deutsch Italiano Español Português Nederlands Svenska Dansk Norwisch (Fig. 2) OK COUNTRY SELECTION Exit United Kingdom Eire France Germany Italy Spain Portugal Holland Belgium and Luxembourg Switzerland Austria Sweden Denmark Norway Other Select your country and press OK (Fig. 3) SEARCHING *The list of languages and countries may vary from one model to another. Installation Instructions (end) AUTO INSTALLATION 003 STATIONS FOUND Searching for TV stations. Please wait. To cancel press EXIT. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 6 Automatic installation Automatic installation The Automatic installation function is useful if you have to go through the installation procedure again, such as when moving house. This function deletes all previously memorised programmes. To install a new channel, you should use the Manual programming function. Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the selected country, so see the Manual programming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, if you have not found certain channels, select Other instead of a country name in the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu, then run automatic installation again. INSTALLATION MAIN MENU 1. Press and hold the key on the remote control to display the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU (The SUMMARY appears first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU). 2. Select the Auto installation line. 3. Validate using Exit Manual programming Auto installation Programme organisation Personal settings . A message will inform you that Automatic installation has begun. Wait for a few minutes. A new message will inform you when Automatic installation is completed. SEARCHING If you wish to check or reorganize your channel key and see the display, press the Programme organisation chapter. AUTO INSTALLATION If you do not wish to reorganize your programmes, you can exit this menu by , then watch the programme of pressing your choice. Choose the desired programme using the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the / keys. 003 STATIONS FOUND Searching for TV stations. Please wait. To cancel press EXIT. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 7 GB Before running AUTO INSTALLATION, check the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu to ensure that the country displayed is correct. Programme organisation Programme organisation During automatic installation, your television will search for the channel name and assign it a programme number according to the selected country. You can use the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION menu to name any channel name not found, to change the order in which the channels are displayed, or to delete channels for which reception is too poor. Follow the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below. GB If you wish to access the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION, menu thereafter, first press and hold key on the remote control to the display the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU (the SUMMARY is displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU) then select Programme . organisation and validate using - To delete a programme for which reception is too poor: 1. Select the line marked Select program. / or Left/Right keys to list 2. Use the your channels. 3. When you get to a channel you wish to delete, select the line marked Delete program. to delete the programme. 4. Press . 5. .Validate using - To organize your channels to suit you: 1. Select the line marked Select program.. 2. Use the / or Left/Right keys and the programmes logos to find the programme to which you wish to give the No.1. Its present number appears on the line marked Select program.. 3. Select the line marked Swap with PR. 4. Enter 01. . The two programmes swap 5. Press position and the desired programme becomes N°1. 6. Repeat the above procedure for the other channels. INSTALLATION MAIN MENU Exit Manual programming Auto installation Programme organisation Personal settings PROGRAMME ORGANISATION Return Select program. Swap with PR. Change pr. name Delete program. 13 -EURO 13 MTV FR2 TF1 EURO CH40 CC01 ARTE CART ---ARD Select programme number using PR-/PR+ or </> or 0 to 9 keys. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. - To name your channels: 1. Select the line marked Change pr. name 2. Select the character you wish to modify using the Left/Right keys. 3. Use the and keys to display the letter you require. The name you have entered will be memorised when you move to another line or exit the menu. If you wish to change the order in which your programmes are displayed or if you wish to name other programmes, repeat the procedures described above. When you have finished organizing the . programmes, exit the menu using www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Manual programming Manual programming The manual installation function is useful if some programmes have not been installed even after AUTOMATIC INSTALLATION. , the SUMMARY is 1. Press and hold displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU. 2. Select the line marked Manual programming. . 3. Display the menu using 4. Now continue by following the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below. Standard : Select the standard using Left/Right keys that corresponds to your country from the list of standards. The number of standards proposed will differ from one model to another. France for France and Luxemburg DKK’ eg. for Eastern Europe and the Middle-East I for the United Kingdom and Ireland Euro BG for Western Europe INSTALLATION MAIN MENU Exit Manual programming GB Auto installation Programme organisation Personal settings MANUAL PROGRAMMING Return Standard Reception Autosearch Fine tuning Store on PR number Name Decoder External sound path EURO BG Cable CH- ----- Reception : Your television can pick up channels either via Enter channel number or start an aerial (RF channels) or via a cable network. autosearch with < or >. Certain cable networks use the same frequencies as the RF channels. If this is the case, you must select Aerial instead of Cable. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous Autosearch : Enter the programme number if you know it. If not, search using the Left/Right keys. Your television will stop at the first channel it tunes into. If you wish to memorize it, go to the line marked Store on PR number. If not, resume the search using the Left/Right keys. Fine tuning : You can use this to improve the picture if the transmitter frequency is out of adjustment. Use the Left/Right keys to obtain the best possible picture and sound. Store on PR number : . Enter the programme number you wish to give the channel (e.g.: 01 for BBC1). Memorise using Name : If the station has been identified by the transmitter, its name will be inscribed automatically. You can change the proposed name or enter it if it has not already been identified. Select the character you wish to modify using the Left/Right keys. Use the or keys to display the character you desire. Decoder : Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box if the channel is coded and if a decoder is connected to the AV1 jack. External sound path : Switch on your decoder. If the sound is coded or if you have no sound, activate or deactivate the box as required using the Left/Right keys. Once you have made all the adjustments you wish to a programme, go to Store on PR number and press to memorise these. Then move on to the next channel. Once you have completed your Manual Programming, exit the menu using . www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 9 Personal settings Personal settings GB 1. Press and hold the key: the SUMMARY is displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU. 2. Select the line marked Personal settings. INSTALLATION MAIN MENU Exit Manual programming 3. Display the menu using . 4. Continue by following the messages at the bottom of the screen. Auto installation For further details, read the information below. Personal settings Menu language : Select the language in which the menus are to be displayed. PERSONAL SETTINGS Country : Indicate the country in which you are if you wish to rerun Automatic Programming. For cable networks, if certain channels have not been found, select Other instead of the country name before running automatic installation again. You may find that the characters of certain teletext languages are inaccessible for the selected country. Auto volume level : This is a sound control function which aims to equalise the volume level between different channels, and between different programmes on the same channel. Activate or deactivate the auto volume level as required. Programme organisation Return Menu language English Country UK Auto volume level AV1 name AV2 name AV3 name VCR ---CAMC Prog. to be used for reference time 06 Select a station from which you want to get the reference time. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. On models equipped with Virtual Dolby Surround, this function remains inactive if Dolby Virtual has been selected in the SOUND menu (see Volume Control). AV1, AV2, AV3 name : Use these to give a name to each of your audio-visual programmes. Select the character you wish to modify using the Left/Right keys. or keys to display the desired Use the character. Prog. to be used for reference time : key or to use To display the time using the the alarm function, the television clock must be set to the correct time. Select the line marked Prog. to be used for reference time and select a channel which broadcasts teletext. The time is set automatically and is displayed after the channel number. Exit the menu using . www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 10 13:15 Preferences Preferences 1. Display the SUMMARY by pressing and releasing the key on the remote control . 2. Select the line marked Preferences. . 3. Display the menu using Show program. number : If you wish to permanently display the number of the programme you are watching, tick the box using the Left/Right keys. Press the Left/Right keys again to deactivate this function. PREFERENCES Return Show program. number AV2 video input AV3 video input Format control Picture preferences GB Make your choice from the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Video S-Video Auto AV2 video input : Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV2 SCART socket (Video or S-Video). AV3 video input : Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV3 sockets (these sockets are located on the front or the side of the television). Format control : Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired picture format: Auto : if the transmitter (for 16/9 format TV’s) or the appliance connected to one of the peripheral jacks delivers the switching signal, the television automatically adapts to the transmitted picture format. 16/9 : manually selects widescreen picture format. 4/3 : manually selects this picture format. If you have selected 16/9 or 4/3, the television will switch back to Auto when you change channels or you switch off. Picture preferences : To access the PICTURE PREFERENCES . menu, press If you wish, you can personalize certain picture settings. Select and set the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Settings : Select Standard or Personal. Standard corresponds to the factory settings. Personal corresponds to the settings that you have entered yourself. The lines Brightness, Colour and Contrast are displayed only if you have selected Personal on the Settings line. Select each line one after the other and enter your required settings. You can recall these picture settings by pressing the red key on the remote control. . Exit the menu using PICTURE PREFERENCES Return Settings Brightness Colour Contrast Personal Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 11 Daily viewing Daily viewing Picture Adjustment GB Display the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select Picture. Validate . The PICTURE menu is displayed. using Select and set the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Brightness, Colour, Contrast, Sharpness: Select each of these lines one after the other and set as required. Contrast expand : Select this line then choose the desired Contrast expand setting (High or Low). Tone : Select this line then choose the desired colour tone (Warm, Neutral or Cold). Exit the menu using . PICTURE Return Brightness Colour Contrast Sharpness Neutral Cold Contrast expand Tone Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. Sound Settings Display the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select the line marked . The SOUND menu Sound. Validate using is displayed. Select and set the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Sound type : The choices available to you depend on your television model and the broadcast. Stereo, Dual or NICAM reception and the corresponding choices are only available on Stereo or NICAM Stereo televisions. Select this line, then select the type of sound you desire. Sound mode : Select this line, then choose the desired mode using the Left/Right keys. The choices available to you depend on your television model and the type of sound. Magic and Dolby Virtual modes are only available in stereo on TV’s equipped with Virtual Dolby Surround. Stereo wide is only available on Stereo or Nicam televisions not equipped with Virtual Dolby Surround. Balance L/R : Select this line, then balance the sound between the Left and Right loudspeakers. Treble, Bass : Select each of these lines and adjust to suit you. Surround effect : This line appears only if you have selected Dolby Virtual on the Sound mode line. Select this line and adjust the surround effect to suit you. Exit the menu using . SOUND Return Automatic Normal Sound type Sound mode Balance L/R Treble Bass Surround effect Broadcast mono stereo dual NICAM-3 AV Mode Choice automatic - mono mono - stereo sound 1 - sound 2 sound 1 - sound 2 - sound 3 stereo - sound 1 - sound 2 Effect Normal : reproduces the original sound ( mono or stereo). Wide : gives a stereo effect on mono sounds. Stereo wide : accentuates the stereo effect. Magic : accentuates the stereo effects and adds echo. Dolby Virtual : Virtual Dolby Surround. Virtual Surround Dolby is based on Dolby Pro Logic decoding for the reproduction of the Left, Right, Centre and Virtual Surround sound channels using two loudspeakers. “”Dolby”, “”Pro Logic” and the double -D symbol are trademarks of the Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 12 Daily viewing Time Display the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select the line marked . The TIME menu is Time. Validate using displayed. Sleep timer : Use the Left/Right keys to choose how long you wish to view before the television switches off. The television will switch off automatically at the end of this period. To cancel, set to 00:00. One minute before switching off, a message will inform you that the television is about to go off. If you wish to keep it on, press any key on the remote control or the local keyboard. The television switches to Child lock mode after an automatic stop. It can only be switched on again from the remote control. TIME Return Sleep timer 00 : 00 Current time 11 : 28 Wake-up timer Wake-up time Programme number Daily 07 : 07 01 BBC1 GB You can use this menu to switch your television on or off automatically at a set time. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. Current time : The current time is given by the Teletext (see PERSONAL SETTINGS menu). You can also set the time manually using the number keys (0 to 9) on your remote control. Wake-up timer : If you wish to be woken up by your television on the channel of your choice, you must first set the television clock to the correct time (see above). Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box and display the Wake-up timer menu. The lines Wake-up time, Programme number and Daily only appear if you have ticked the box on the line marked Wake-up timer. Wake-up time : Use the number keys (0 to 9) on the remote control to set the time at which you wish to be woken. Programme number : Select the programme you wish to be woken by. Daily : Tick this box if you wish to be awakened at this time every day. . Exit the menu using Set the television to standby using the key on the remote control. The red indicator light on the television flashes. The television will come on automatically at the programmed time and will go off one hour later if you do not use the remote control. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 13 Daily viewing List of Channels GB This list contains up to 10 pages. The number of pages depends on the number of programmes memorized. For each programme, the list indicates the station name or type and the programme number. The 3 AV programmes are listed on page 11. To display the list, press the key on the remote control or key on the remote control. Select the Display the SUMMARY using the . line marked List. Validate using The page displayed is the page containing the programme you are watching. It is identified in the list by the symbol TV. To display the next page, press the Right key. To display the previous page, press the Left key. If you wish to watch one of the programmes on the page displayed: Enter the last digit of the programme number (e.g. for 25 simply enter 5) on the remote control. The list disappears and your programme is selected. Or, - Select the programme using the Up/Down keys. . - Validate using . - Exit the menu using www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 14 LIST Exit 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 BBC 1 BBC 2 FR 3 CC19 ARTE M6 CNN PREM EURO TV Page -/+ Programme: 0 - 9 Daily viewing Selecting Programmes GB For channels 1 to 9, press the number key corresponding to the desired channel on the remote control. For programme numbers higher than 10, press the key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now use the number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit. If you press while ”- -” is already displayed, the display returns to 0- , in which case you can only select programmes 1 to 9. Scrolling the Programmes You can scroll through the programmes using the / keys. Audio-visual (AV) Programmes Press the key to call the last audio-visual (AV) programme watched. Press repeatedly to scroll the audio-visual (AV) programmes on the screen. Volume Control Use the volume +/- keys to increase or decrease the volume. Muting the Sound Press the key to mute the sound. Press again to restore the sound. Zoom (16/9 models only) This function is useful for 4/3 or letterbox pictures (black bands at the top and bottom of the screen). Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired zoom position: ZOOM 0: 4/3 picture (black bands at the sides). FULL SCREEN: for a 4/3 picture that fills the screen. ZOOM 1: for letterbox pictures. Displaying Information Press the of sound. key to display the following information on the screen: channel number and name, time, zoom, type Television Lock You can use this function to prevent anyone from switching on the television using the buttons on the television set. The buttons on the television set are locked in the following cases: - If you switch off the set by pressing and holding the key on the remote control for more than 3 seconds, - After a programmed stop, - If the television is set to standby when the alarm has been set. When the television is locked the red power will be light flashing. The television can now only be operated from the remote control. To release the lock, press any number key on the remote control. Switching Off the Television To switch off the television, press the Standby key on the remote control or press the ON/OFF switch on the television set. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 15 Teletext Teletext GB Certain channels broadcast an electronic news page service with a range of different information services. The presentation and use of the Teletext differ from one country to another and from one programme to another (Teletext, Fastext or Toptext). Press the key to display the Teletext Index (page 100). A message will inform you if the programme you are watching has no Teletext service. To call up a page: Enter the 3 digits of the page number you wish to consult (for example, 150 or 170). After a moment, the page appears. Use the Left/Right keys to consult the next or the previous page. Standard Functions Rolling pages: Some information is displayed over several sub-pages. It is scrolled on your screen as it is received. . Press again to continue To stop scrolling, select STOP using the Up/Down keys and validate using scrolling. Masked text: To reveal a hidden answer (for example in a quiz programme), select ??? using the Up/Down keys and validate . Press again to hide the answers. using Zoom : Select ZOOM using the Up/Down keys then press the key once to magnify the top of the screen, twice to magnify the bottom of the screen (the page will scroll from top to bottom) and a third time to return to the normal display. Display: You can superpose the Teletext page over the TV picture. To do this, select MIX using the Up/Down keys then validate by pressing the key. Press again to return to the normal display. Sub-code: You can use this to access a sub-page directly. Select “- - - -” using the Up/Down keys. Then enter the four digits of the required sub-page number. Certain programmes have Alarm pages that you can set to appear at the time you require. For example: for 15h30 enter 1530 as the sub-page number then press . You must of course leave the television on the programme which is to transmit the Alarm page. Index: To call up the index page, select 100 using the Up/Down keys then validate using . Direct access: You can use the yellow and blue keys to directly access the pages indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen. Fastext functions: If the Teletext you receive is Fastext, a sub-menu at the bottom of the screen appears which you can use to select from the 4 headings according to its colour. To select a heading, press the key of the corresponding colour. Toptext functions: If the Teletext you receive is TOPtext, the pages are arranged into headings and sub-headings by subject. You can select the first page of a heading directly by pressing the blue key, or the first page of a sub-heading by pressing the yellow key. Other functions: With certain Teletext channels, it is possible to have sub-titles overlaid on the screen for certain broadcasts as well as certain news flash updates. The corresponding page number is indicated in the Telextext index. Once you have found the page, the sub-title or the news flash will be overlaid onto the TV picture. key. The navigation status bar disappears after a few seconds. To display it again, press the or . To exit Teletext, press www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 16 Other Connections Other Connections The CINCH Video and Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connect a VHS or 8mm camcorder. The S and CINCH Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connect a S-VHS or Hi-8 camcorder. GB To use the appliance you have connected, press the key several times until the AV3 programme is selected on the screen. When you switch off the connected appliance, the television will remain on the AV3 programme and you must use the numerical keys on the remote control to select a programme. * on models equipped with this function The headphone socket (2)* is provided to connect a headphone or earphones. Connecting headphones mute the sound from the television loudspeakers. Other Possibilities Copying a cassette: Plug the VCR you wish to record to into the SCART socket AV2. Plug the appliance you wish to copy from as follows: into the peripheral jack AV1 for a VCR; into the CINCH AV3 jacks for a camcorder (see table below). RECORD PLAY Appliance * on models equipped with this function SCART Socket Appliance SCART Socket CALL PROGRAMME Peripheral AV1 VCR ou Camcorder AV2 AV1 Cinches or S-Video AV3 VCR ou Camcorder AV2 AV3 VCR Camcorder Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier If you wish to connect a HiFi or AV amplifier, plug it into the peripheral jack AV2 using a SCART-CINCH type lead. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 17 BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG - MANUALE DI UTILIZZAZIONE - USER MANUAL Ο∆ΗΓΙΕ ΧΡΗΣΕΩ www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 0& 7& 10 cm 5 cm 10 cm 10 cm www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr About this manual This document is common to several television models. Therefore, certain functions or settings may not apply to the model you have purchased The position of the ON/OFF switch differs depending on the model. It may be located on the front or on the right-hand side of your set (see the drawing inside the cover page of your manual). About safety To ensure your own safety and safe operation of the equipment, observe the following instructions thoroughly. TV sets require sufficient ventilation to prevent their components from overheating, which will cause failure. Do not block the ventilation openings at the rear. If you place your TV set in a special piece of furniture, make sure there is enough space for unhindered air circulation. Do not place the TV set in the close vicinity of a heater. The TV set has been designed for use in dry rooms. Should you use it, in exceptional circumstances in the open air (example: on the balcony, in the veranda or tent), you must absolutely protect it against moisture (dew, rain, splash water). Before switching on a cold TV set in a warm room, you should wait until any condensation in the screen has dried by itself. Maximum ambient temperature: 35°C Maximum humidity: 85% By the end of your TV evening or when away from home for a longer period, we recommend that you turn off the TV set with the On/Off-switch. Even when the On/Off-switch is in the Off-position, your TV set is not fully disconnected from the mains. To disconnect the set completely, the mains plug must be pulled out. The mains plug must be easily accessible. In the following cases, we recommend that you pull out the mains connector: 1. During a thunderstorm. In such a case, it is advisable that you also disconnect the TV set from the aerial socket. 2. When odour or smoke emanates from the set. Never attempt to open your TV set yourself. Further information: The TV set shielding is sufficient to prevent X-radiation to the exterior. Any operation performed by a non skilled person, change of high voltage or replacement of the picture tube by a model not complying with the manufacturer specification are likely to cause considerable increase in X-radiation. A TV set modified in such a way no longer complies with the manufacturers’ specification and must not be used. About cleaning The screen is to be cleaned with liquid glass cleaners. : Never use abrasive products. : Clean the cabinet with a soft cloth soaked with neutral cleaner. Do not use solvents, such as white spirit or alcohol-based cleaning products since they may damage your television. : At regular intervals, clean the ventilation grids at the rear of the TV set. About degaussing The terrestrial magnetic field may have an influence on your TV set. This influence is revealed by the coloured spots, which appear on the screen. Should this be the case: : Turn the equipment off by means of the On/Off-switch. : Wait about one hour before switching the set on again. This procedure performs automatic degaussing of the screen. Should there still be coloured spots on the screen, repeat the operation. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 1 GB About the switch Contents GB Using the remote control and fitting the batteries. How to call up a menu and how to select a function, a setting or an option. About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About degaussing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Basic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Navigation principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Calling up the Installation main menu . . . 5 Calling up the Settings summary . . . . . . . 5 Page Instructions for Use Installation Page 4 Daily viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Picture Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 List of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Selecting Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Scrolling the Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Audio-visual (AV) Programmes . . . . . . 15 Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Muting the Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Zoom (16/9 models only) . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Calling up a Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Displaying Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Navigating within the Menus . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Television Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Installing your television for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Switching Off the Television . . . . . . . . . 15 Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Automatic installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Standard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Programme organisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Other Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Manual programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Other Possibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Personal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier . . . . 17 Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 2 5 Basic connections Basic connections The mains plug (1) supplies power to the television. The television must only be plugged in to a 220-240 V - 50 Hz power supply. It must never be plugged in to a DC source. If the plug comes away from the lead, never attempt to plug it in: this could cause electrocution. Continental Europe If you connect an appliance to the aerial jack, you must give it a channel number. To do this, switch on the appliance, then use the television to find the modulator channel (see the appliance manual). Now give it a programme number and memorise it (see Manual Programming of channels). Then, when you wish to use the appliance, simply select its programme number on the television. This procedure is not required for VCR’s not equipped with a modulator. GB The aerial socket (2), located on the rear of the television, can be used to connect an external aerial or other appliance equipped with a modulator such as a VCR, satellite receiver, etc. United Kingdom The plug is fitted with a fuse which protects your television. If your television does not work, the fuse may be blown. In this case, replace it with an identical 5 Amp ASTA or lr BSI (BS 1362) certified fuse. $ The SCART socket AV1 (3), located on the rear of the television, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder (VHS, 8 mm), a Canal+ decoder, a video games console or RGB-signal emitting appliances. The SCART socket AV2 (3), located on the rear of the television, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder (VHS, 8 mm, S-VHS or Hi-8). Note: the mains lead of your television is fitted with a moulded plug. This lead contains all the safety equipment, so you are advised when replacing it not to use a non-specific commercially-available model. We strongly recommend the use of this type of connection, which gives a better picture quality. To use the peripheral appliance that you have connected, press the AV key on your remote control (press once to select AV1; twice to select AV2; three times for AV3: see ”Other Connections”). This selection is automatic for some appliances. Pressing “”play” on a VCR, or switching on a satellite receiver connected to AV1 or AV2 will automatically switch on your television. When you stop the VCR, if you have not changed channels while watching the VCR, the television automatically switches back to the channel you were watching beforehand. If the television has been switched on from the VCR, it switches to standby when the VCR is switched off. The television automatically switches to 16/9 format if the connected appliance delivers the corresponding signal. 2 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 3 Remote control Remote control Display of channel, time, sound (yellow This key is active only when using the Teletext (blue key) button) (and zoom for models with zoom) Call up programme list Standby GB (green button) Call up Teletext / Toptext / Fastext function (purple button) Reminder of picture preferences (red button) Right/Left Selection within menus and Zoom Function (for models with this function) Confirm an action or validate a menu option Go to adjustment function MENU To leave a menu or Teletext Move Up/Down in menus Volume adjustment Change programme Sound mute 8 Go to programmes and enter numerical values in menus Selecting appliances connected to the television (AV1, AV2 ...) For programme numbers higher than 10, press the 0 key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now use the number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit. The red, green, yellow and blue keys are also used for the Teletext. Please respect the environment! Before throwing any batteries away, consult your distributor who may be able to take them back for specific recycling. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 4 Navigation principles Navigation principles Calling up the Installation main menu INSTALLATION MAIN MENU If there is no menu displayed on the screen, key on the remote press and hold the control. The settings SUMMARY is displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU which you can use to operate your television. Exit Manual programming Auto installation GB Programme organisation Personal settings Calling up the Settings summary SUMMARY Press and release the key on the remote control to display the list of menus available for using your television functions or adjusting your television Exit Teletext Picture Sound Calling up a Menu List Select the menu you wish using the Up/Down key to validate.. keys. Press the Time Preferences Navigating within the Menus Use the Up/Down keys 1 to select a line. Use the Left/Right keys 2 to: - Increase or decrease a value: for example: Fine tuning - Select an option: Aerial for example: Reception Cable Reception - Activate or deactivate an option: for example: Decoder - Access a sub-menu: for example: Picture preferences You can use the 3 MANUAL PROGRAMMING Return Standard Reception Autosearch Fine tuning Store on PR number Name Decoder External sound path EURO BG Cable CH- ----- Enter channel number or start autosearch with < or >. key to: - Activate or deactivate an option: for example: Decoder - Access a sub-menu: for example: Picture preferences - Validate an action: for example: Store on PR number Use the 4 key to exit a menu. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 5 Installing your television for the first time Installing your television for the first time First plug the television into a mains power outlet and to the external aerial or a cable network, then switch on using located on the front or the side of your set. the ON/OFF switch When you switch on your television for the first time, the language selection menu* is displayed (Fig. 1). If this does key on the television until this menu appears. not happen, set the television to standby then press and hold the GB Installation Instructions (start) 1. Use the Up/Down keys to select the language in which you wish the menus to be displayed. . 2. Then validate using 3. A list of countries* is now displayed (Fig. 2). Select the country in which you live, or the country from which you wish to receive the broadcasts if you live in a border area. . 4. Then validate using 5. A welcome message is displayed. 6. Run the automatic installation sequence . using 7. A message appears to inform you that automatic installation has started (Fig. 3). Wait for a few minutes. A new message will inform you when automatic installation is completed. 8. If you wish to check or modify the channel and see the organisation, press Programme organisation chapter. If you do not wish to modify the channel organisation, you can exit the menu by then watch the channel of pressing your choice. Choose the desired channel using the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the / keys. If you have a decoder, see the Manual programming chapter. Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the country you have selected. See the Manual channel programming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, read the Automatic channel installation chapter to install any channels not found. (Fig. 1) English Français Deutsch Italiano Español Português Nederlands Svenska Dansk Norwisch (Fig. 2) OK COUNTRY SELECTION Exit United Kingdom Eire France Germany Italy Spain Portugal Holland Belgium and Luxembourg Switzerland Austria Sweden Denmark Norway Other Select your country and press OK (Fig. 3) SEARCHING *The list of languages and countries may vary from one model to another. Installation Instructions (end) AUTO INSTALLATION 003 STATIONS FOUND Searching for TV stations. Please wait. To cancel press EXIT. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 6 Automatic installation Automatic installation The Automatic installation function is useful if you have to go through the installation procedure again, such as when moving house. This function deletes all previously memorised programmes. To install a new channel, you should use the Manual programming function. Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the selected country, so see the Manual programming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, if you have not found certain channels, select Other instead of a country name in the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu, then run automatic installation again. INSTALLATION MAIN MENU 1. Press and hold the key on the remote control to display the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU (The SUMMARY appears first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU). 2. Select the Auto installation line. 3. Validate using Exit Manual programming Auto installation Programme organisation Personal settings . A message will inform you that Automatic installation has begun. Wait for a few minutes. A new message will inform you when Automatic installation is completed. SEARCHING If you wish to check or reorganize your channel key and see the display, press the Programme organisation chapter. AUTO INSTALLATION If you do not wish to reorganize your programmes, you can exit this menu by , then watch the programme of pressing your choice. Choose the desired programme using the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the / keys. 003 STATIONS FOUND Searching for TV stations. Please wait. To cancel press EXIT. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 7 GB Before running AUTO INSTALLATION, check the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu to ensure that the country displayed is correct. Programme organisation Programme organisation During automatic installation, your television will search for the channel name and assign it a programme number according to the selected country. You can use the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION menu to name any channel name not found, to change the order in which the channels are displayed, or to delete channels for which reception is too poor. Follow the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below. GB If you wish to access the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION, menu thereafter, first press and hold key on the remote control to the display the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU (the SUMMARY is displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU) then select Programme . organisation and validate using - To delete a programme for which reception is too poor: 1. Select the line marked Select program. / or Left/Right keys to list 2. Use the your channels. 3. When you get to a channel you wish to delete, select the line marked Delete program. to delete the programme. 4. Press . 5. .Validate using - To organize your channels to suit you: 1. Select the line marked Select program.. 2. Use the / or Left/Right keys and the programmes logos to find the programme to which you wish to give the No.1. Its present number appears on the line marked Select program.. 3. Select the line marked Swap with PR. 4. Enter 01. . The two programmes swap 5. Press position and the desired programme becomes N°1. 6. Repeat the above procedure for the other channels. INSTALLATION MAIN MENU Exit Manual programming Auto installation Programme organisation Personal settings PROGRAMME ORGANISATION Return Select program. Swap with PR. Change pr. name Delete program. 13 -EURO 13 MTV FR2 TF1 EURO CH40 CC01 ARTE CART ---ARD Select programme number using PR-/PR+ or </> or 0 to 9 keys. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. - To name your channels: 1. Select the line marked Change pr. name 2. Select the character you wish to modify using the Left/Right keys. 3. Use the and keys to display the letter you require. The name you have entered will be memorised when you move to another line or exit the menu. If you wish to change the order in which your programmes are displayed or if you wish to name other programmes, repeat the procedures described above. When you have finished organizing the . programmes, exit the menu using www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Manual programming Manual programming The manual installation function is useful if some programmes have not been installed even after AUTOMATIC INSTALLATION. , the SUMMARY is 1. Press and hold displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU. 2. Select the line marked Manual programming. . 3. Display the menu using 4. Now continue by following the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below. Standard : Select the standard using Left/Right keys that corresponds to your country from the list of standards. The number of standards proposed will differ from one model to another. France for France and Luxemburg DKK’ eg. for Eastern Europe and the Middle-East I for the United Kingdom and Ireland Euro BG for Western Europe INSTALLATION MAIN MENU Exit Manual programming GB Auto installation Programme organisation Personal settings MANUAL PROGRAMMING Return Standard Reception Autosearch Fine tuning Store on PR number Name Decoder External sound path EURO BG Cable CH- ----- Reception : Your television can pick up channels either via Enter channel number or start an aerial (RF channels) or via a cable network. autosearch with < or >. Certain cable networks use the same frequencies as the RF channels. If this is the case, you must select Aerial instead of Cable. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous Autosearch : Enter the programme number if you know it. If not, search using the Left/Right keys. Your television will stop at the first channel it tunes into. If you wish to memorize it, go to the line marked Store on PR number. If not, resume the search using the Left/Right keys. Fine tuning : You can use this to improve the picture if the transmitter frequency is out of adjustment. Use the Left/Right keys to obtain the best possible picture and sound. Store on PR number : . Enter the programme number you wish to give the channel (e.g.: 01 for BBC1). Memorise using Name : If the station has been identified by the transmitter, its name will be inscribed automatically. You can change the proposed name or enter it if it has not already been identified. Select the character you wish to modify using the Left/Right keys. Use the or keys to display the character you desire. Decoder : Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box if the channel is coded and if a decoder is connected to the AV1 jack. External sound path : Switch on your decoder. If the sound is coded or if you have no sound, activate or deactivate the box as required using the Left/Right keys. Once you have made all the adjustments you wish to a programme, go to Store on PR number and press to memorise these. Then move on to the next channel. Once you have completed your Manual Programming, exit the menu using . www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 9 Personal settings Personal settings GB 1. Press and hold the key: the SUMMARY is displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU. 2. Select the line marked Personal settings. INSTALLATION MAIN MENU Exit Manual programming 3. Display the menu using . 4. Continue by following the messages at the bottom of the screen. Auto installation For further details, read the information below. Personal settings Menu language : Select the language in which the menus are to be displayed. PERSONAL SETTINGS Country : Indicate the country in which you are if you wish to rerun Automatic Programming. For cable networks, if certain channels have not been found, select Other instead of the country name before running automatic installation again. You may find that the characters of certain teletext languages are inaccessible for the selected country. Auto volume level : This is a sound control function which aims to equalise the volume level between different channels, and between different programmes on the same channel. Activate or deactivate the auto volume level as required. Programme organisation Return Menu language English Country UK Auto volume level AV1 name AV2 name AV3 name VCR ---CAMC Prog. to be used for reference time 06 Select a station from which you want to get the reference time. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. On models equipped with Virtual Dolby Surround, this function remains inactive if Dolby Virtual has been selected in the SOUND menu (see Volume Control). AV1, AV2, AV3 name : Use these to give a name to each of your audio-visual programmes. Select the character you wish to modify using the Left/Right keys. or keys to display the desired Use the character. Prog. to be used for reference time : key or to use To display the time using the the alarm function, the television clock must be set to the correct time. Select the line marked Prog. to be used for reference time and select a channel which broadcasts teletext. The time is set automatically and is displayed after the channel number. Exit the menu using . www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 10 13:15 Preferences Preferences 1. Display the SUMMARY by pressing and releasing the key on the remote control . 2. Select the line marked Preferences. . 3. Display the menu using Show program. number : If you wish to permanently display the number of the programme you are watching, tick the box using the Left/Right keys. Press the Left/Right keys again to deactivate this function. PREFERENCES Return Show program. number AV2 video input AV3 video input Format control Picture preferences GB Make your choice from the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Video S-Video Auto AV2 video input : Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV2 SCART socket (Video or S-Video). AV3 video input : Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV3 sockets (these sockets are located on the front or the side of the television). Format control : Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired picture format: Auto : if the transmitter (for 16/9 format TV’s) or the appliance connected to one of the peripheral jacks delivers the switching signal, the television automatically adapts to the transmitted picture format. 16/9 : manually selects widescreen picture format. 4/3 : manually selects this picture format. If you have selected 16/9 or 4/3, the television will switch back to Auto when you change channels or you switch off. Picture preferences : To access the PICTURE PREFERENCES . menu, press If you wish, you can personalize certain picture settings. Select and set the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Settings : Select Standard or Personal. Standard corresponds to the factory settings. Personal corresponds to the settings that you have entered yourself. The lines Brightness, Colour and Contrast are displayed only if you have selected Personal on the Settings line. Select each line one after the other and enter your required settings. You can recall these picture settings by pressing the red key on the remote control. . Exit the menu using PICTURE PREFERENCES Return Settings Brightness Colour Contrast Personal Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 11 Daily viewing Daily viewing Picture Adjustment GB Display the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select Picture. Validate . The PICTURE menu is displayed. using Select and set the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Brightness, Colour, Contrast, Sharpness: Select each of these lines one after the other and set as required. Contrast expand : Select this line then choose the desired Contrast expand setting (High or Low). Tone : Select this line then choose the desired colour tone (Warm, Neutral or Cold). Exit the menu using . PICTURE Return Brightness Colour Contrast Sharpness Neutral Cold Contrast expand Tone Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. Sound Settings Display the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select the line marked . The SOUND menu Sound. Validate using is displayed. Select and set the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Sound type : The choices available to you depend on your television model and the broadcast. Stereo, Dual or NICAM reception and the corresponding choices are only available on Stereo or NICAM Stereo televisions. Select this line, then select the type of sound you desire. Sound mode : Select this line, then choose the desired mode using the Left/Right keys. The choices available to you depend on your television model and the type of sound. Magic and Dolby Virtual modes are only available in stereo on TV’s equipped with Virtual Dolby Surround. Stereo wide is only available on Stereo or Nicam televisions not equipped with Virtual Dolby Surround. Balance L/R : Select this line, then balance the sound between the Left and Right loudspeakers. Treble, Bass : Select each of these lines and adjust to suit you. Surround effect : This line appears only if you have selected Dolby Virtual on the Sound mode line. Select this line and adjust the surround effect to suit you. Exit the menu using . SOUND Return Automatic Normal Sound type Sound mode Balance L/R Treble Bass Surround effect Broadcast mono stereo dual NICAM-3 AV Mode Choice automatic - mono mono - stereo sound 1 - sound 2 sound 1 - sound 2 - sound 3 stereo - sound 1 - sound 2 Effect Normal : reproduces the original sound ( mono or stereo). Wide : gives a stereo effect on mono sounds. Stereo wide : accentuates the stereo effect. Magic : accentuates the stereo effects and adds echo. Dolby Virtual : Virtual Dolby Surround. Virtual Surround Dolby is based on Dolby Pro Logic decoding for the reproduction of the Left, Right, Centre and Virtual Surround sound channels using two loudspeakers. “”Dolby”, “”Pro Logic” and the double -D symbol are trademarks of the Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 12 Daily viewing Time Display the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select the line marked . The TIME menu is Time. Validate using displayed. Sleep timer : Use the Left/Right keys to choose how long you wish to view before the television switches off. The television will switch off automatically at the end of this period. To cancel, set to 00:00. One minute before switching off, a message will inform you that the television is about to go off. If you wish to keep it on, press any key on the remote control or the local keyboard. The television switches to Child lock mode after an automatic stop. It can only be switched on again from the remote control. TIME Return Sleep timer 00 : 00 Current time 11 : 28 Wake-up timer Wake-up time Programme number Daily 07 : 07 01 BBC1 GB You can use this menu to switch your television on or off automatically at a set time. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. Current time : The current time is given by the Teletext (see PERSONAL SETTINGS menu). You can also set the time manually using the number keys (0 to 9) on your remote control. Wake-up timer : If you wish to be woken up by your television on the channel of your choice, you must first set the television clock to the correct time (see above). Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box and display the Wake-up timer menu. The lines Wake-up time, Programme number and Daily only appear if you have ticked the box on the line marked Wake-up timer. Wake-up time : Use the number keys (0 to 9) on the remote control to set the time at which you wish to be woken. Programme number : Select the programme you wish to be woken by. Daily : Tick this box if you wish to be awakened at this time every day. . Exit the menu using Set the television to standby using the key on the remote control. The red indicator light on the television flashes. The television will come on automatically at the programmed time and will go off one hour later if you do not use the remote control. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 13 Daily viewing List of Channels GB This list contains up to 10 pages. The number of pages depends on the number of programmes memorized. For each programme, the list indicates the station name or type and the programme number. The 3 AV programmes are listed on page 11. To display the list, press the key on the remote control or key on the remote control. Select the Display the SUMMARY using the . line marked List. Validate using The page displayed is the page containing the programme you are watching. It is identified in the list by the symbol TV. To display the next page, press the Right key. To display the previous page, press the Left key. If you wish to watch one of the programmes on the page displayed: Enter the last digit of the programme number (e.g. for 25 simply enter 5) on the remote control. The list disappears and your programme is selected. Or, - Select the programme using the Up/Down keys. . - Validate using . - Exit the menu using www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 14 LIST Exit 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 BBC 1 BBC 2 FR 3 CC19 ARTE M6 CNN PREM EURO TV Page -/+ Programme: 0 - 9 Daily viewing Selecting Programmes GB For channels 1 to 9, press the number key corresponding to the desired channel on the remote control. For programme numbers higher than 10, press the key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now use the number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit. If you press while ”- -” is already displayed, the display returns to 0- , in which case you can only select programmes 1 to 9. Scrolling the Programmes You can scroll through the programmes using the / keys. Audio-visual (AV) Programmes Press the key to call the last audio-visual (AV) programme watched. Press repeatedly to scroll the audio-visual (AV) programmes on the screen. Volume Control Use the volume +/- keys to increase or decrease the volume. Muting the Sound Press the key to mute the sound. Press again to restore the sound. Zoom (16/9 models only) This function is useful for 4/3 or letterbox pictures (black bands at the top and bottom of the screen). Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired zoom position: ZOOM 0: 4/3 picture (black bands at the sides). FULL SCREEN: for a 4/3 picture that fills the screen. ZOOM 1: for letterbox pictures. Displaying Information Press the of sound. key to display the following information on the screen: channel number and name, time, zoom, type Television Lock You can use this function to prevent anyone from switching on the television using the buttons on the television set. The buttons on the television set are locked in the following cases: - If you switch off the set by pressing and holding the key on the remote control for more than 3 seconds, - After a programmed stop, - If the television is set to standby when the alarm has been set. When the television is locked the red power will be light flashing. The television can now only be operated from the remote control. To release the lock, press any number key on the remote control. Switching Off the Television To switch off the television, press the Standby key on the remote control or press the ON/OFF switch on the television set. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 15 Teletext Teletext GB Certain channels broadcast an electronic news page service with a range of different information services. The presentation and use of the Teletext differ from one country to another and from one programme to another (Teletext, Fastext or Toptext). Press the key to display the Teletext Index (page 100). A message will inform you if the programme you are watching has no Teletext service. To call up a page: Enter the 3 digits of the page number you wish to consult (for example, 150 or 170). After a moment, the page appears. Use the Left/Right keys to consult the next or the previous page. Standard Functions Rolling pages: Some information is displayed over several sub-pages. It is scrolled on your screen as it is received. . Press again to continue To stop scrolling, select STOP using the Up/Down keys and validate using scrolling. Masked text: To reveal a hidden answer (for example in a quiz programme), select ??? using the Up/Down keys and validate . Press again to hide the answers. using Zoom : Select ZOOM using the Up/Down keys then press the key once to magnify the top of the screen, twice to magnify the bottom of the screen (the page will scroll from top to bottom) and a third time to return to the normal display. Display: You can superpose the Teletext page over the TV picture. To do this, select MIX using the Up/Down keys then validate by pressing the key. Press again to return to the normal display. Sub-code: You can use this to access a sub-page directly. Select “- - - -” using the Up/Down keys. Then enter the four digits of the required sub-page number. Certain programmes have Alarm pages that you can set to appear at the time you require. For example: for 15h30 enter 1530 as the sub-page number then press . You must of course leave the television on the programme which is to transmit the Alarm page. Index: To call up the index page, select 100 using the Up/Down keys then validate using . Direct access: You can use the yellow and blue keys to directly access the pages indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen. Fastext functions: If the Teletext you receive is Fastext, a sub-menu at the bottom of the screen appears which you can use to select from the 4 headings according to its colour. To select a heading, press the key of the corresponding colour. Toptext functions: If the Teletext you receive is TOPtext, the pages are arranged into headings and sub-headings by subject. You can select the first page of a heading directly by pressing the blue key, or the first page of a sub-heading by pressing the yellow key. Other functions: With certain Teletext channels, it is possible to have sub-titles overlaid on the screen for certain broadcasts as well as certain news flash updates. The corresponding page number is indicated in the Telextext index. Once you have found the page, the sub-title or the news flash will be overlaid onto the TV picture. key. The navigation status bar disappears after a few seconds. To display it again, press the or . To exit Teletext, press www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 16 Other Connections Other Connections The CINCH Video and Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connect a VHS or 8mm camcorder. The S and CINCH Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connect a S-VHS or Hi-8 camcorder. GB To use the appliance you have connected, press the key several times until the AV3 programme is selected on the screen. When you switch off the connected appliance, the television will remain on the AV3 programme and you must use the numerical keys on the remote control to select a programme. * on models equipped with this function The headphone socket (2)* is provided to connect a headphone or earphones. Connecting headphones mute the sound from the television loudspeakers. Other Possibilities Copying a cassette: Plug the VCR you wish to record to into the SCART socket AV2. Plug the appliance you wish to copy from as follows: into the peripheral jack AV1 for a VCR; into the CINCH AV3 jacks for a camcorder (see table below). RECORD PLAY Appliance * on models equipped with this function SCART Socket Appliance SCART Socket CALL PROGRAMME Peripheral AV1 VCR ou Camcorder AV2 AV1 Cinches or S-Video AV3 VCR ou Camcorder AV2 AV3 VCR Camcorder Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier If you wish to connect a HiFi or AV amplifier, plug it into the peripheral jack AV2 using a SCART-CINCH type lead. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 17 M a d’ u t B e d n i n l M a n u t l i u l i a n u i t e a l z a z e t n a t G i e z a B r v j v e j l F o l h u t i 21DU21E 21MT21E 25DG21E 25DT21E 25DU23E 28DG21E 28WS21E 29DL21E 29MH21E d i n e e k i a i n t o z a e ó n s - n g n - n n d e l i i n i r z n e l g o c s s t j k e i i i u B n d a u w i - l z r n s a a i b g u u l n e n n o e a M l i u s m a s e U u i i a u g g i ç s - n g d e ã o 21DU23E 24WK21E 25DH21E 25DU21E 25MH21E 28DT21E 29DH21E 29DU21E 33MS21E www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 10 cm 5 cm 10 cm 10 cm www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr About this manual This document is common to several television models. Therefore, certain functions or settings may not apply to the model you have purchased The position of the ON/OFF switch differs depending on the model. It may be located on the front or on the right-hand side of your set (see the drawing inside the cover page of your manual). About safety To ensure your own safety and safe operation of the equipment, observe the following instructions thoroughly. TV sets require sufficient ventilation to prevent their components from overheating, which will cause failure. Do not block the ventilation openings at the rear. If you place your TV set in a special piece of furniture, make sure there is enough space for unhindered air circulation. Do not place the TV set in the close vicinity of a heater. The TV set has been designed for use in dry rooms. Should you use it, in exceptional circumstances in the open air (example: on the balcony, in the veranda or tent), you must absolutely protect it against moisture (dew, rain, splash water). Before switching on a cold TV set in a warm room, you should wait until any condensation in the screen has dried by itself. Maximum ambient temperature: 35°C Maximum humidity: 85% By the end of your TV evening or when away from home for a longer period, we recommend that you turn off the TV set with the On/Off-switch. Even when the On/Off-switch is in the Off-position, your TV set is not fully disconnected from the mains. To disconnect the set completely, the mains plug must be pulled out. The mains plug must be easily accessible. In the following cases, we recommend that you pull out the mains connector: 1. During a thunderstorm. In such a case, it is advisable that you also disconnect the TV set from the aerial socket. 2. When odour or smoke emanates from the set. Never attempt to open your TV set yourself. Further information: The TV set shielding is sufficient to prevent X-radiation to the exterior. Any operation performed by a non skilled person, change of high voltage or replacement of the picture tube by a model not complying with the manufacturer specification are likely to cause considerable increase in X-radiation. A TV set modified in such a way no longer complies with the manufacturers’ specification and must not be used. About cleaning The screen is to be cleaned with liquid glass cleaners. : Never use abrasive products. : Clean the cabinet with a soft cloth soaked with neutral cleaner. Do not use solvents, such as white spirit or alcohol-based cleaning products since they may damage your television. : At regular intervals, clean the ventilation grids at the rear of the TV set. About degaussing The terrestrial magnetic field may have an influence on your TV set. This influence is revealed by the coloured spots, which appear on the screen. Should this be the case: : Turn the equipment off by means of the On/Off-switch. : Wait about one hour before switching the set on again. This procedure performs automatic degaussing of the screen. Should there still be coloured spots on the screen, repeat the operation. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 1 GB About the switch Contents GB Using the remote control and fitting the batteries. How to call up a menu and how to select a function, a setting or an option. About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About degaussing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Basic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Navigation principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Calling up the Installation main menu . . . 5 Calling up the Settings summary . . . . . . . 5 Page Instructions for Use Installation Page 4 Daily viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Picture Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 List of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Selecting Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Scrolling the Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Audio-visual (AV) Programmes . . . . . . 15 Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Muting the Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Zoom (16/9 models only) . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Calling up a Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Displaying Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Navigating within the Menus . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Television Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Installing your television for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Switching Off the Television . . . . . . . . . 15 Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Automatic installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Standard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Programme organisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Other Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Manual programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Other Possibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Personal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier . . . . 17 Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 2 5 Basic connections Basic connections The mains plug (1) supplies power to the television. The television must only be plugged in to a 220-240 V - 50 Hz power supply. It must never be plugged in to a DC source. If the plug comes away from the lead, never attempt to plug it in: this could cause electrocution. Continental Europe If you connect an appliance to the aerial jack, you must give it a channel number. To do this, switch on the appliance, then use the television to find the modulator channel (see the appliance manual). Now give it a programme number and memorise it (see Manual Programming of channels). Then, when you wish to use the appliance, simply select its programme number on the television. This procedure is not required for VCR’s not equipped with a modulator. GB The aerial socket (2), located on the rear of the television, can be used to connect an external aerial or other appliance equipped with a modulator such as a VCR, satellite receiver, etc. United Kingdom The plug is fitted with a fuse which protects your television. If your television does not work, the fuse may be blown. In this case, replace it with an identical 5 Amp ASTA or lr BSI (BS 1362) certified fuse. $ The SCART socket AV1 (3), located on the rear of the television, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder (VHS, 8 mm), a Canal+ decoder, a video games console or RGB-signal emitting appliances. The SCART socket AV2 (3), located on the rear of the television, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder (VHS, 8 mm, S-VHS or Hi-8). Note: the mains lead of your television is fitted with a moulded plug. This lead contains all the safety equipment, so you are advised when replacing it not to use a non-specific commercially-available model. We strongly recommend the use of this type of connection, which gives a better picture quality. To use the peripheral appliance that you have connected, press the AV key on your remote control (press once to select AV1; twice to select AV2; three times for AV3: see ”Other Connections”). This selection is automatic for some appliances. Pressing “”play” on a VCR, or switching on a satellite receiver connected to AV1 or AV2 will automatically switch on your television. When you stop the VCR, if you have not changed channels while watching the VCR, the television automatically switches back to the channel you were watching beforehand. If the television has been switched on from the VCR, it switches to standby when the VCR is switched off. The television automatically switches to 16/9 format if the connected appliance delivers the corresponding signal. 2 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 3 Remote control Remote control Display of channel, time, sound (yellow This key is active only when using the Teletext (blue key) button) (and zoom for models with zoom) Call up programme list Standby GB (green button) Call up Teletext / Toptext / Fastext function (purple button) Reminder of picture preferences (red button) Right/Left Selection within menus and Zoom Function (for models with this function) Confirm an action or validate a menu option Go to adjustment function MENU To leave a menu or Teletext Move Up/Down in menus Volume adjustment Change programme Sound mute 8 Go to programmes and enter numerical values in menus Selecting appliances connected to the television (AV1, AV2 ...) For programme numbers higher than 10, press the 0 key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now use the number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit. The red, green, yellow and blue keys are also used for the Teletext. Please respect the environment! Before throwing any batteries away, consult your distributor who may be able to take them back for specific recycling. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 4 Navigation principles Navigation principles Calling up the Installation main menu INSTALLATION MAIN MENU If there is no menu displayed on the screen, key on the remote press and hold the control. The settings SUMMARY is displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU which you can use to operate your television. Exit Manual programming Auto installation GB Programme organisation Personal settings Calling up the Settings summary SUMMARY Press and release the key on the remote control to display the list of menus available for using your television functions or adjusting your television Exit Teletext Picture Sound Calling up a Menu List Select the menu you wish using the Up/Down key to validate.. keys. Press the Time Preferences Navigating within the Menus Use the Up/Down keys 1 to select a line. Use the Left/Right keys 2 to: - Increase or decrease a value: for example: Fine tuning - Select an option: Aerial for example: Reception Cable Reception - Activate or deactivate an option: for example: Decoder - Access a sub-menu: for example: Picture preferences You can use the 3 MANUAL PROGRAMMING Return Standard Reception Autosearch Fine tuning Store on PR number Name Decoder External sound path EURO BG Cable CH- ----- Enter channel number or start autosearch with < or >. key to: - Activate or deactivate an option: for example: Decoder - Access a sub-menu: for example: Picture preferences - Validate an action: for example: Store on PR number Use the 4 key to exit a menu. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 5 Installing your television for the first time Installing your television for the first time First plug the television into a mains power outlet and to the external aerial or a cable network, then switch on using located on the front or the side of your set. the ON/OFF switch When you switch on your television for the first time, the language selection menu* is displayed (Fig. 1). If this does key on the television until this menu appears. not happen, set the television to standby then press and hold the GB Installation Instructions (start) 1. Use the Up/Down keys to select the language in which you wish the menus to be displayed. . 2. Then validate using 3. A list of countries* is now displayed (Fig. 2). Select the country in which you live, or the country from which you wish to receive the broadcasts if you live in a border area. . 4. Then validate using 5. A welcome message is displayed. 6. Run the automatic installation sequence . using 7. A message appears to inform you that automatic installation has started (Fig. 3). Wait for a few minutes. A new message will inform you when automatic installation is completed. 8. If you wish to check or modify the channel and see the organisation, press Programme organisation chapter. If you do not wish to modify the channel organisation, you can exit the menu by then watch the channel of pressing your choice. Choose the desired channel using the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the / keys. If you have a decoder, see the Manual programming chapter. Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the country you have selected. See the Manual channel programming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, read the Automatic channel installation chapter to install any channels not found. (Fig. 1) English Français Deutsch Italiano Español Português Nederlands Svenska Dansk Norwisch (Fig. 2) OK COUNTRY SELECTION Exit United Kingdom Eire France Germany Italy Spain Portugal Holland Belgium and Luxembourg Switzerland Austria Sweden Denmark Norway Other Select your country and press OK (Fig. 3) SEARCHING *The list of languages and countries may vary from one model to another. Installation Instructions (end) AUTO INSTALLATION 003 STATIONS FOUND Searching for TV stations. Please wait. To cancel press EXIT. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 6 Automatic installation Automatic installation The Automatic installation function is useful if you have to go through the installation procedure again, such as when moving house. This function deletes all previously memorised programmes. To install a new channel, you should use the Manual programming function. Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the selected country, so see the Manual programming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, if you have not found certain channels, select Other instead of a country name in the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu, then run automatic installation again. INSTALLATION MAIN MENU 1. Press and hold the key on the remote control to display the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU (The SUMMARY appears first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU). 2. Select the Auto installation line. 3. Validate using Exit Manual programming Auto installation Programme organisation Personal settings . A message will inform you that Automatic installation has begun. Wait for a few minutes. A new message will inform you when Automatic installation is completed. SEARCHING If you wish to check or reorganize your channel key and see the display, press the Programme organisation chapter. AUTO INSTALLATION If you do not wish to reorganize your programmes, you can exit this menu by , then watch the programme of pressing your choice. Choose the desired programme using the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the / keys. 003 STATIONS FOUND Searching for TV stations. Please wait. To cancel press EXIT. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 7 GB Before running AUTO INSTALLATION, check the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu to ensure that the country displayed is correct. Programme organisation Programme organisation During automatic installation, your television will search for the channel name and assign it a programme number according to the selected country. You can use the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION menu to name any channel name not found, to change the order in which the channels are displayed, or to delete channels for which reception is too poor. Follow the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below. GB If you wish to access the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION, menu thereafter, first press and hold key on the remote control to the display the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU (the SUMMARY is displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU) then select Programme . organisation and validate using - To delete a programme for which reception is too poor: 1. Select the line marked Select program. / or Left/Right keys to list 2. Use the your channels. 3. When you get to a channel you wish to delete, select the line marked Delete program. to delete the programme. 4. Press . 5. .Validate using - To organize your channels to suit you: 1. Select the line marked Select program.. 2. Use the / or Left/Right keys and the programmes logos to find the programme to which you wish to give the No.1. Its present number appears on the line marked Select program.. 3. Select the line marked Swap with PR. 4. Enter 01. . The two programmes swap 5. Press position and the desired programme becomes N°1. 6. Repeat the above procedure for the other channels. INSTALLATION MAIN MENU Exit Manual programming Auto installation Programme organisation Personal settings PROGRAMME ORGANISATION Return Select program. Swap with PR. Change pr. name Delete program. 13 -EURO 13 MTV FR2 TF1 EURO CH40 CC01 ARTE CART ---ARD Select programme number using PR-/PR+ or </> or 0 to 9 keys. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. - To name your channels: 1. Select the line marked Change pr. name 2. Select the character you wish to modify using the Left/Right keys. 3. Use the and keys to display the letter you require. The name you have entered will be memorised when you move to another line or exit the menu. If you wish to change the order in which your programmes are displayed or if you wish to name other programmes, repeat the procedures described above. When you have finished organizing the . programmes, exit the menu using www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Manual programming Manual programming The manual installation function is useful if some programmes have not been installed even after AUTOMATIC INSTALLATION. , the SUMMARY is 1. Press and hold displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU. 2. Select the line marked Manual programming. . 3. Display the menu using 4. Now continue by following the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below. Standard : Select the standard using Left/Right keys that corresponds to your country from the list of standards. The number of standards proposed will differ from one model to another. France for France and Luxemburg DKK’ eg. for Eastern Europe and the Middle-East I for the United Kingdom and Ireland Euro BG for Western Europe INSTALLATION MAIN MENU Exit Manual programming GB Auto installation Programme organisation Personal settings MANUAL PROGRAMMING Return Standard Reception Autosearch Fine tuning Store on PR number Name Decoder External sound path EURO BG Cable CH- ----- Reception : Your television can pick up channels either via Enter channel number or start an aerial (RF channels) or via a cable network. autosearch with < or >. Certain cable networks use the same frequencies as the RF channels. If this is the case, you must select Aerial instead of Cable. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous Autosearch : Enter the programme number if you know it. If not, search using the Left/Right keys. Your television will stop at the first channel it tunes into. If you wish to memorize it, go to the line marked Store on PR number. If not, resume the search using the Left/Right keys. Fine tuning : You can use this to improve the picture if the transmitter frequency is out of adjustment. Use the Left/Right keys to obtain the best possible picture and sound. Store on PR number : . Enter the programme number you wish to give the channel (e.g.: 01 for BBC1). Memorise using Name : If the station has been identified by the transmitter, its name will be inscribed automatically. You can change the proposed name or enter it if it has not already been identified. Select the character you wish to modify using the Left/Right keys. Use the or keys to display the character you desire. Decoder : Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box if the channel is coded and if a decoder is connected to the AV1 jack. External sound path : Switch on your decoder. If the sound is coded or if you have no sound, activate or deactivate the box as required using the Left/Right keys. Once you have made all the adjustments you wish to a programme, go to Store on PR number and press to memorise these. Then move on to the next channel. Once you have completed your Manual Programming, exit the menu using . www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 9 Personal settings Personal settings GB 1. Press and hold the key: the SUMMARY is displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU. 2. Select the line marked Personal settings. INSTALLATION MAIN MENU Exit Manual programming 3. Display the menu using . 4. Continue by following the messages at the bottom of the screen. Auto installation For further details, read the information below. Personal settings Menu language : Select the language in which the menus are to be displayed. PERSONAL SETTINGS Country : Indicate the country in which you are if you wish to rerun Automatic Programming. For cable networks, if certain channels have not been found, select Other instead of the country name before running automatic installation again. You may find that the characters of certain teletext languages are inaccessible for the selected country. Auto volume level : This is a sound control function which aims to equalise the volume level between different channels, and between different programmes on the same channel. Activate or deactivate the auto volume level as required. Programme organisation Return Menu language English Country UK Auto volume level AV1 name AV2 name AV3 name VCR ---CAMC Prog. to be used for reference time 06 Select a station from which you want to get the reference time. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. On models equipped with Virtual Dolby Surround, this function remains inactive if Dolby Virtual has been selected in the SOUND menu (see Volume Control). AV1, AV2, AV3 name : Use these to give a name to each of your audio-visual programmes. Select the character you wish to modify using the Left/Right keys. or keys to display the desired Use the character. Prog. to be used for reference time : key or to use To display the time using the the alarm function, the television clock must be set to the correct time. Select the line marked Prog. to be used for reference time and select a channel which broadcasts teletext. The time is set automatically and is displayed after the channel number. Exit the menu using . www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 10 13:15 Preferences Preferences 1. Display the SUMMARY by pressing and releasing the key on the remote control . 2. Select the line marked Preferences. . 3. Display the menu using Show program. number : If you wish to permanently display the number of the programme you are watching, tick the box using the Left/Right keys. Press the Left/Right keys again to deactivate this function. PREFERENCES Return Show program. number AV2 video input AV3 video input Format control Picture preferences GB Make your choice from the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Video S-Video Auto AV2 video input : Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV2 SCART socket (Video or S-Video). AV3 video input : Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV3 sockets (these sockets are located on the front or the side of the television). Format control : Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired picture format: Auto : if the transmitter (for 16/9 format TV’s) or the appliance connected to one of the peripheral jacks delivers the switching signal, the television automatically adapts to the transmitted picture format. 16/9 : manually selects widescreen picture format. 4/3 : manually selects this picture format. If you have selected 16/9 or 4/3, the television will switch back to Auto when you change channels or you switch off. Picture preferences : To access the PICTURE PREFERENCES . menu, press If you wish, you can personalize certain picture settings. Select and set the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Settings : Select Standard or Personal. Standard corresponds to the factory settings. Personal corresponds to the settings that you have entered yourself. The lines Brightness, Colour and Contrast are displayed only if you have selected Personal on the Settings line. Select each line one after the other and enter your required settings. You can recall these picture settings by pressing the red key on the remote control. . Exit the menu using PICTURE PREFERENCES Return Settings Brightness Colour Contrast Personal Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 11 Daily viewing Daily viewing Picture Adjustment GB Display the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select Picture. Validate . The PICTURE menu is displayed. using Select and set the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Brightness, Colour, Contrast, Sharpness: Select each of these lines one after the other and set as required. Contrast expand : Select this line then choose the desired Contrast expand setting (High or Low). Tone : Select this line then choose the desired colour tone (Warm, Neutral or Cold). Exit the menu using . PICTURE Return Brightness Colour Contrast Sharpness Neutral Cold Contrast expand Tone Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. Sound Settings Display the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select the line marked . The SOUND menu Sound. Validate using is displayed. Select and set the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Sound type : The choices available to you depend on your television model and the broadcast. Stereo, Dual or NICAM reception and the corresponding choices are only available on Stereo or NICAM Stereo televisions. Select this line, then select the type of sound you desire. Sound mode : Select this line, then choose the desired mode using the Left/Right keys. The choices available to you depend on your television model and the type of sound. Magic and Dolby Virtual modes are only available in stereo on TV’s equipped with Virtual Dolby Surround. Stereo wide is only available on Stereo or Nicam televisions not equipped with Virtual Dolby Surround. Balance L/R : Select this line, then balance the sound between the Left and Right loudspeakers. Treble, Bass : Select each of these lines and adjust to suit you. Surround effect : This line appears only if you have selected Dolby Virtual on the Sound mode line. Select this line and adjust the surround effect to suit you. Exit the menu using . SOUND Return Automatic Normal Sound type Sound mode Balance L/R Treble Bass Surround effect Broadcast mono stereo dual NICAM-3 AV Mode Choice automatic - mono mono - stereo sound 1 - sound 2 sound 1 - sound 2 - sound 3 stereo - sound 1 - sound 2 Effect Normal : reproduces the original sound ( mono or stereo). Wide : gives a stereo effect on mono sounds. Stereo wide : accentuates the stereo effect. Magic : accentuates the stereo effects and adds echo. Dolby Virtual : Virtual Dolby Surround. Virtual Surround Dolby is based on Dolby Pro Logic decoding for the reproduction of the Left, Right, Centre and Virtual Surround sound channels using two loudspeakers. “”Dolby”, “”Pro Logic” and the double -D symbol are trademarks of the Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 12 Daily viewing Time Display the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select the line marked . The TIME menu is Time. Validate using displayed. Sleep timer : Use the Left/Right keys to choose how long you wish to view before the television switches off. The television will switch off automatically at the end of this period. To cancel, set to 00:00. One minute before switching off, a message will inform you that the television is about to go off. If you wish to keep it on, press any key on the remote control or the local keyboard. The television switches to Child lock mode after an automatic stop. It can only be switched on again from the remote control. TIME Return Sleep timer 00 : 00 Current time 11 : 28 Wake-up timer Wake-up time Programme number Daily 07 : 07 01 BBC1 GB You can use this menu to switch your television on or off automatically at a set time. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. Current time : The current time is given by the Teletext (see PERSONAL SETTINGS menu). You can also set the time manually using the number keys (0 to 9) on your remote control. Wake-up timer : If you wish to be woken up by your television on the channel of your choice, you must first set the television clock to the correct time (see above). Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box and display the Wake-up timer menu. The lines Wake-up time, Programme number and Daily only appear if you have ticked the box on the line marked Wake-up timer. Wake-up time : Use the number keys (0 to 9) on the remote control to set the time at which you wish to be woken. Programme number : Select the programme you wish to be woken by. Daily : Tick this box if you wish to be awakened at this time every day. . Exit the menu using Set the television to standby using the key on the remote control. The red indicator light on the television flashes. The television will come on automatically at the programmed time and will go off one hour later if you do not use the remote control. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 13 Daily viewing List of Channels GB This list contains up to 10 pages. The number of pages depends on the number of programmes memorized. For each programme, the list indicates the station name or type and the programme number. The 3 AV programmes are listed on page 11. To display the list, press the key on the remote control or key on the remote control. Select the Display the SUMMARY using the . line marked List. Validate using The page displayed is the page containing the programme you are watching. It is identified in the list by the symbol TV. To display the next page, press the Right key. To display the previous page, press the Left key. If you wish to watch one of the programmes on the page displayed: Enter the last digit of the programme number (e.g. for 25 simply enter 5) on the remote control. The list disappears and your programme is selected. Or, - Select the programme using the Up/Down keys. . - Validate using . - Exit the menu using www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 14 LIST Exit 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 BBC 1 BBC 2 FR 3 CC19 ARTE M6 CNN PREM EURO TV Page -/+ Programme: 0 - 9 Daily viewing Selecting Programmes GB For channels 1 to 9, press the number key corresponding to the desired channel on the remote control. For programme numbers higher than 10, press the key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now use the number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit. If you press while ”- -” is already displayed, the display returns to 0- , in which case you can only select programmes 1 to 9. Scrolling the Programmes You can scroll through the programmes using the / keys. Audio-visual (AV) Programmes Press the key to call the last audio-visual (AV) programme watched. Press repeatedly to scroll the audio-visual (AV) programmes on the screen. Volume Control Use the volume +/- keys to increase or decrease the volume. Muting the Sound Press the key to mute the sound. Press again to restore the sound. Zoom (16/9 models only) This function is useful for 4/3 or letterbox pictures (black bands at the top and bottom of the screen). Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired zoom position: ZOOM 0: 4/3 picture (black bands at the sides). FULL SCREEN: for a 4/3 picture that fills the screen. ZOOM 1: for letterbox pictures. Displaying Information Press the of sound. key to display the following information on the screen: channel number and name, time, zoom, type Television Lock You can use this function to prevent anyone from switching on the television using the buttons on the television set. The buttons on the television set are locked in the following cases: - If you switch off the set by pressing and holding the key on the remote control for more than 3 seconds, - After a programmed stop, - If the television is set to standby when the alarm has been set. When the television is locked the red power will be light flashing. The television can now only be operated from the remote control. To release the lock, press any number key on the remote control. Switching Off the Television To switch off the television, press the Standby key on the remote control or press the ON/OFF switch on the television set. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 15 Teletext Teletext GB Certain channels broadcast an electronic news page service with a range of different information services. The presentation and use of the Teletext differ from one country to another and from one programme to another (Teletext, Fastext or Toptext). Press the key to display the Teletext Index (page 100). A message will inform you if the programme you are watching has no Teletext service. To call up a page: Enter the 3 digits of the page number you wish to consult (for example, 150 or 170). After a moment, the page appears. Use the Left/Right keys to consult the next or the previous page. Standard Functions Rolling pages: Some information is displayed over several sub-pages. It is scrolled on your screen as it is received. . Press again to continue To stop scrolling, select STOP using the Up/Down keys and validate using scrolling. Masked text: To reveal a hidden answer (for example in a quiz programme), select ??? using the Up/Down keys and validate . Press again to hide the answers. using Zoom : Select ZOOM using the Up/Down keys then press the key once to magnify the top of the screen, twice to magnify the bottom of the screen (the page will scroll from top to bottom) and a third time to return to the normal display. Display: You can superpose the Teletext page over the TV picture. To do this, select MIX using the Up/Down keys then validate by pressing the key. Press again to return to the normal display. Sub-code: You can use this to access a sub-page directly. Select “- - - -” using the Up/Down keys. Then enter the four digits of the required sub-page number. Certain programmes have Alarm pages that you can set to appear at the time you require. For example: for 15h30 enter 1530 as the sub-page number then press . You must of course leave the television on the programme which is to transmit the Alarm page. Index: To call up the index page, select 100 using the Up/Down keys then validate using . Direct access: You can use the yellow and blue keys to directly access the pages indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen. Fastext functions: If the Teletext you receive is Fastext, a sub-menu at the bottom of the screen appears which you can use to select from the 4 headings according to its colour. To select a heading, press the key of the corresponding colour. Toptext functions: If the Teletext you receive is TOPtext, the pages are arranged into headings and sub-headings by subject. You can select the first page of a heading directly by pressing the blue key, or the first page of a sub-heading by pressing the yellow key. Other functions: With certain Teletext channels, it is possible to have sub-titles overlaid on the screen for certain broadcasts as well as certain news flash updates. The corresponding page number is indicated in the Telextext index. Once you have found the page, the sub-title or the news flash will be overlaid onto the TV picture. key. The navigation status bar disappears after a few seconds. To display it again, press the or . To exit Teletext, press www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 16 Other Connections Other Connections The CINCH Video and Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connect a VHS or 8mm camcorder. The S and CINCH Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connect a S-VHS or Hi-8 camcorder. GB To use the appliance you have connected, press the key several times until the AV3 programme is selected on the screen. When you switch off the connected appliance, the television will remain on the AV3 programme and you must use the numerical keys on the remote control to select a programme. * on models equipped with this function The headphone socket (2)* is provided to connect a headphone or earphones. Connecting headphones mute the sound from the television loudspeakers. Other Possibilities Copying a cassette: Plug the VCR you wish to record to into the SCART socket AV2. Plug the appliance you wish to copy from as follows: into the peripheral jack AV1 for a VCR; into the CINCH AV3 jacks for a camcorder (see table below). RECORD PLAY Appliance * on models equipped with this function SCART Socket Appliance SCART Socket CALL PROGRAMME Peripheral AV1 VCR ou Camcorder AV2 AV1 Cinches or S-Video AV3 VCR ou Camcorder AV2 AV3 VCR Camcorder Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier If you wish to connect a HiFi or AV amplifier, plug it into the peripheral jack AV2 using a SCART-CINCH type lead. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 17 B e a n l M a n u t d i l i e e n i u i u t a z z a m a g u n l V U n e z i o n H n u s - g · d i e · U a l · ι ε ς ω ς · DF321C / DF421C / MF221C Ο χ δ ρ η η γ σ ε www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 10 cm 5 cm 10 cm 10 cm www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr About this manual This document is common to several television models. Therefore, certain functions or settings may not apply to the model you have purchased The position of the ON/OFF switch differs depending on the model. It may be located on the front or on the right-hand side of your set (see the drawing inside the cover page of your manual). About safety To ensure your own safety and safe operation of the equipment, observe the following instructions thoroughly. TV sets require sufficient ventilation to prevent their components from overheating, which will cause failure. Do not block the ventilation openings at the rear. If you place your TV set in a special piece of furniture, make sure there is enough space for unhindered air circulation. Do not place the TV set in the close vicinity of a heater. The TV set has been designed for use in dry rooms. Should you use it, in exceptional circumstances in the open air (example: on the balcony, in the veranda or tent), you must absolutely protect it against moisture (dew, rain, splash water). Before switching on a cold TV set in a warm room, you should wait until any condensation in the screen has dried by itself. Maximum ambient temperature: 35°C Maximum humidity: 85% By the end of your TV evening or when away from home for a longer period, we recommend that you turn off the TV set with the On/Off-switch. Even when the On/Off-switch is in the Off-position, your TV set is not fully disconnected from the mains. To disconnect the set completely, the mains plug must be pulled out. The mains plug must be easily accessible. In the following cases, we recommend that you pull out the mains connector: 1. During a thunderstorm. In such a case, it is advisable that you also disconnect the TV set from the aerial socket. 2. When odour or smoke emanates from the set. Never attempt to open your TV set yourself. Further information: The TV set shielding is sufficient to prevent X-radiation to the exterior. Any operation performed by a non skilled person, change of high voltage or replacement of the picture tube by a model not complying with the manufacturer specification are likely to cause considerable increase in X-radiation. A TV set modified in such a way no longer complies with the manufacturers’ specification and must not be used. About cleaning The screen is to be cleaned with liquid glass cleaners. : Never use abrasive products. : Clean the cabinet with a soft cloth soaked with neutral cleaner. Do not use solvents, such as white spirit or alcohol-based cleaning products since they may damage your television. : At regular intervals, clean the ventilation grids at the rear of the TV set. About degaussing The terrestrial magnetic field may have an influence on your TV set. This influence is revealed by the coloured spots, which appear on the screen. Should this be the case: : Turn the equipment off by means of the On/Off-switch. : Wait about one hour before switching the set on again. This procedure performs automatic degaussing of the screen. Should there still be coloured spots on the screen, repeat the operation. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 1 GB About the switch Contents GB Using the remote control and fitting the batteries. How to call up a menu and how to select a function, a setting or an option. About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About degaussing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Basic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Navigation principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Calling up the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Calling up the SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Calling up a Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Navigating within the Menus . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Page Instructions for Use Installation Page 4 5 Daily viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Picture Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 List of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Selecting Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Scrolling the Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Audio-visual (AV) Programmes . . . . . . 15 Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Muting the Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Zoom (16/9 models only) . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Displaying Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Television Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Switching Off the Television . . . . . . . . . 15 Installing your television for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Automatic installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Standard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Programme organisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Other Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Manual programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Other Possibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier . . . . 17 Personal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 2 C17 / BASIC / 4000 / GB-TBA / I 6.3 / B Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Basic connections Basic connections The mains plug (1) supplies power to the television. The television must only be plugged in to a 220-240 V - 50 Hz power supply. It must never be plugged in to a DC source. If the plug comes away from the lead, never attempt to plug it in: this could cause electrocution. Continental Europe If you connect an appliance to the aerial jack, you must give it a channel number. To do this, switch on the appliance, then use the television to find the modulator channel (see the appliance manual). Now give it a programme number and memorise it (see Manual Programming of channels). Then, when you wish to use the appliance, simply select its programme number on the television. This procedure is not required for VCR’s not equipped with a modulator. GB The aerial socket (2), located on the rear of the television, can be used to connect an external aerial or other appliance equipped with a modulator such as a VCR, satellite receiver, etc. United Kingdom The plug is fitted with a fuse which protects your television. If your television does not work, the fuse may be blown. In this case, replace it with an identical 5 Amp ASTA or lr BSI (BS 1362) certified fuse. $ The SCART socket AV1 (3), located on the rear of the television, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder (VHS, 8 mm), a Canal+ decoder, a video games console or RGB-signal emitting appliances. The SCART socket AV2 (3), located on the rear of the television, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder (VHS, 8 mm, S-VHS or Hi-8). Note: the mains lead of your television is fitted with a moulded plug. This lead contains all the safety equipment, so you are advised when replacing it not to use a non-specific commercially-available model. We strongly recommend the use of this type of connection, which gives a better picture quality. To use the peripheral appliance that you have connected, press the AV key on your remote control (press once to select AV1; twice to select AV2; three times for AV3: see ”Other Connections”). This selection is automatic for some appliances. Pressing “”play” on a VCR, or switching on a satellite receiver connected to AV1 or AV2 will automatically switch on your television. When you stop the VCR, if you have not changed channels while watching the VCR, the television automatically switches back to the channel you were watching beforehand. If the television has been switched on from the VCR, it switches to standby when the VCR is switched off. The television automatically switches to 16/9 format if the connected appliance delivers the corresponding signal. 2 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 3 Remote control Remote control Display of channel, time, sound This key is active only when using the Teletext (blue key) (yellow button) (and zoom for models with zoom) GB Standby Call up Teletext / Toptext / Fastext function (purple button) Call up programme list (green button) Right/Left Selection within Reminder of picture preferences (red button) menus and Zoom Function (for models with this function) Illumination of remote control Confirm an action or validate buttons a menu option To leave a menu or Teletext Go to adjustment function MENU Volume adjustment Move Up/Down in menus Sound mute Change programme Go to programmes and enter numerical values in menus Selecting appliances connected to the television For programme numbers higher than 10, press the 0 key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now use the number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit. (AV1, AV2 ...) The red, green, yellow and blue keys are also used for the Teletext. Please respect the environment! Before throwing any batteries away, consult your distributor who may be able to take them back for specific recycling. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr Navigation principles Navigation principles Calling up the Installation main menu INSTALLATION MAIN MENU If there is no menu displayed on the screen, key on the remote press and hold the control. The settings SUMMARY is displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU which you can use to operate your television. Exit Manual programming Auto installation GB Programme organisation Personal settings Calling up the Settings summary SUMMARY Press and release the key on the remote control to display the list of menus available for using your television functions or adjusting your television Exit Teletext Picture Sound Calling up a Menu List Select the menu you wish using the Up/Down key to validate.. keys. Press the Time Preferences Navigating within the Menus Use the Up/Down keys 1 to select a line. Use the Left/Right keys 2 to: - Increase or decrease a value: for example: Fine tuning - Select an option: Aerial for example: Reception Cable Reception - Activate or deactivate an option: for example: Decoder - Access a sub-menu: for example: Picture preferences You can use the 3 MANUAL PROGRAMMING Return Standard Reception Autosearch Fine tuning Store on PR number Name Decoder External sound path EURO BG Cable CH- ----- Enter channel number or start autosearch with < or >. key to: - Activate or deactivate an option: for example: Decoder - Access a sub-menu: for example: Picture preferences - Validate an action: for example: Store on PR number Use the 4 key to exit a menu. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 5 Installing your television for the first time Installing your television for the first time First plug the television into a mains power outlet and to the external aerial or a cable network, then switch on using located on the front or the side of your set. the ON/OFF switch When you switch on your television for the first time, the language selection menu* is displayed (Fig. 1). If this does key on the television until this menu appears. not happen, set the television to standby then press and hold the GB Installation Instructions (start) 1. Use the Up/Down keys to select the language in which you wish the menus to be displayed. . 2. Then validate using 3. A list of countries* is now displayed (Fig. 2). Select the country in which you live, or the country from which you wish to receive the broadcasts if you live in a border area. . 4. Then validate using 5. A welcome message is displayed. 6. Run the automatic installation sequence . using 7. A message appears to inform you that automatic installation has started (Fig. 3). Wait for a few minutes. A new message will inform you when automatic installation is completed. 8. If you wish to check or modify the channel and see the organisation, press Programme organisation chapter. If you do not wish to modify the channel organisation, you can exit the menu by then watch the channel of pressing your choice. Choose the desired channel using the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the / keys. If you have a decoder, see the Manual programming chapter. Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the country you have selected. See the Manual channel programming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, read the Automatic channel installation chapter to install any channels not found. (Fig. 1) English Français Deutsch Italiano Español Português Nederlands Svenska Dansk Norwisch (Fig. 2) OK COUNTRY SELECTION Exit United Kingdom Eire France Germany Italy Spain Portugal Holland Belgium and Luxembourg Switzerland Austria Sweden Denmark Norway Other Select your country and press OK (Fig. 3) SEARCHING *The list of languages and countries may vary from one model to another. Installation Instructions (end) AUTO INSTALLATION 003 STATIONS FOUND Searching for TV stations. Please wait. To cancel press EXIT. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 6 Automatic installation Automatic installation The Automatic installation function is useful if you have to go through the installation procedure again, such as when moving house. This function deletes all previously memorised programmes. To install a new channel, you should use the Manual programming function. Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the selected country, so see the Manual programming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, if you have not found certain channels, select Other instead of a country name in the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu, then run automatic installation again. INSTALLATION MAIN MENU 1. Press and hold the key on the remote control to display the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU (The SUMMARY appears first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU). 2. Select the Auto installation line. 3. Validate using Exit Manual programming Auto installation Programme organisation Personal settings . A message will inform you that Automatic installation has begun. Wait for a few minutes. A new message will inform you when Automatic installation is completed. SEARCHING If you wish to check or reorganize your channel key and see the display, press the Programme organisation chapter. AUTO INSTALLATION If you do not wish to reorganize your programmes, you can exit this menu by , then watch the programme of pressing your choice. Choose the desired programme using the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the / keys. 003 STATIONS FOUND Searching for TV stations. Please wait. To cancel press EXIT. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 7 GB Before running AUTO INSTALLATION, check the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu to ensure that the country displayed is correct. Programme organisation Programme organisation During automatic installation, your television will search for the channel name and assign it a programme number according to the selected country. You can use the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION menu to name any channel name not found, to change the order in which the channels are displayed, or to delete channels for which reception is too poor. Follow the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below. GB If you wish to access the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION, menu thereafter, first press and hold key on the remote control to the display the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU (the SUMMARY is displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU) then select Programme . organisation and validate using - To delete a programme for which reception is too poor: 1. Select the line marked Select program. / or Left/Right keys to list 2. Use the your channels. 3. When you get to a channel you wish to delete, select the line marked Delete program. to delete the programme. 4. Press . 5. .Validate using - To organize your channels to suit you: 1. Select the line marked Select program.. 2. Use the / or Left/Right keys and the programmes logos to find the programme to which you wish to give the No.1. Its present number appears on the line marked Select program.. 3. Select the line marked Swap with PR. 4. Enter 01. . The two programmes swap 5. Press position and the desired programme becomes N°1. 6. Repeat the above procedure for the other channels. INSTALLATION MAIN MENU Exit Manual programming Auto installation Programme organisation Personal settings PROGRAMME ORGANISATION Return Select program. Swap with PR. Change pr. name Delete program. 13 -EURO 13 MTV FR2 TF1 EURO CH40 CC01 ARTE CART ---ARD Select programme number using PR-/PR+ or </> or 0 to 9 keys. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. - To name your channels: 1. Select the line marked Change pr. name 2. Select the character you wish to modify using the Left/Right keys. 3. Use the and keys to display the letter you require. The name you have entered will be memorised when you move to another line or exit the menu. If you wish to change the order in which your programmes are displayed or if you wish to name other programmes, repeat the procedures described above. When you have finished organizing the . programmes, exit the menu using www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Manual programming Manual programming The manual installation function is useful if some programmes have not been installed even after AUTOMATIC INSTALLATION. , the SUMMARY is 1. Press and hold displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU. 2. Select the line marked Manual programming. . 3. Display the menu using 4. Now continue by following the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below. Standard : Select the standard using Left/Right keys that corresponds to your country from the list of standards. The number of standards proposed will differ from one model to another. France for France and Luxemburg DKK’ eg. for Eastern Europe and the Middle-East I for the United Kingdom and Ireland Euro BG for Western Europe INSTALLATION MAIN MENU Exit Manual programming GB Auto installation Programme organisation Personal settings MANUAL PROGRAMMING Return Standard Reception Autosearch Fine tuning Store on PR number Name Decoder External sound path EURO BG Cable CH- ----- Reception : Your television can pick up channels either via Enter channel number or start an aerial (RF channels) or via a cable network. autosearch with < or >. Certain cable networks use the same frequencies as the RF channels. If this is the case, you must select Aerial instead of Cable. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous Autosearch : Enter the programme number if you know it. If not, search using the Left/Right keys. Your television will stop at the first channel it tunes into. If you wish to memorize it, go to the line marked Store on PR number. If not, resume the search using the Left/Right keys. Fine tuning : You can use this to improve the picture if the transmitter frequency is out of adjustment. Use the Left/Right keys to obtain the best possible picture and sound. Store on PR number : . Enter the programme number you wish to give the channel (e.g.: 01 for BBC1). Memorise using Name : If the station has been identified by the transmitter, its name will be inscribed automatically. You can change the proposed name or enter it if it has not already been identified. Select the character you wish to modify using the Left/Right keys. Use the or keys to display the character you desire. Decoder : Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box if the channel is coded and if a decoder is connected to the AV1 jack. External sound path : Switch on your decoder. If the sound is coded or if you have no sound, activate or deactivate the box as required using the Left/Right keys. Once you have made all the adjustments you wish to a programme, go to Store on PR number and press to memorise these. Then move on to the next channel. Once you have completed your Manual Programming, exit the menu using . www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 9 Personal settings Personal settings GB 1. Press and hold the key: the SUMMARY is displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU. 2. Select the line marked Personal settings. INSTALLATION MAIN MENU Exit Manual programming 3. Display the menu using . 4. Continue by following the messages at the bottom of the screen. Auto installation For further details, read the information below. Personal settings Menu language : Select the language in which the menus are to be displayed. PERSONAL SETTINGS Country : Indicate the country in which you are if you wish to rerun Automatic Programming. For cable networks, if certain channels have not been found, select Other instead of the country name before running automatic installation again. You may find that the characters of certain teletext languages are inaccessible for the selected country. Auto volume level : This is a sound control function which aims to equalise the volume level between different channels, and between different programmes on the same channel. Activate or deactivate the auto volume level as required. Programme organisation Return Menu language English Country UK Auto volume level AV1 name AV2 name AV3 name VCR ---CAMC Prog. to be used for reference time 06 Select a station from which you want to get the reference time. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. On models equipped with Virtual Dolby Surround, this function remains inactive if Dolby Virtual has been selected in the SOUND menu (see Volume Control). AV1, AV2, AV3 name : Use these to give a name to each of your audio-visual programmes. Select the character you wish to modify using the Left/Right keys. or keys to display the desired Use the character. Prog. to be used for reference time : key or to use To display the time using the the alarm function, the television clock must be set to the correct time. Select the line marked Prog. to be used for reference time and select a channel which broadcasts teletext. The time is set automatically and is displayed after the channel number. Exit the menu using . www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 10 13:15 Preferences Preferences 1. Display the SUMMARY by pressing and releasing the key on the remote control . 2. Select the line marked Preferences. . 3. Display the menu using Show program. number : If you wish to permanently display the number of the programme you are watching, tick the box using the Left/Right keys. Press the Left/Right keys again to deactivate this function. PREFERENCES Return Show program. number AV2 video input AV3 video input Format control Picture preferences GB Make your choice from the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Video S-Video Auto AV2 video input : Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV2 SCART socket (Video or S-Video). AV3 video input : Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV3 sockets (these sockets are located on the front or the side of the television). Format control : Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired picture format: Auto : if the transmitter (for 16/9 format TV’s) or the appliance connected to one of the peripheral jacks delivers the switching signal, the television automatically adapts to the transmitted picture format. 16/9 : manually selects widescreen picture format. 4/3 : manually selects this picture format. If you have selected 16/9 or 4/3, the television will switch back to Auto when you change channels or you switch off. Picture preferences : To access the PICTURE PREFERENCES . menu, press If you wish, you can personalize certain picture settings. Select and set the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Settings : Select Standard or Personal. Standard corresponds to the factory settings. Personal corresponds to the settings that you have entered yourself. The lines Brightness, Colour and Contrast are displayed only if you have selected Personal on the Settings line. Select each line one after the other and enter your required settings. You can recall these picture settings by pressing the red key on the remote control. . Exit the menu using PICTURE PREFERENCES Return Settings Brightness Colour Contrast Personal Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 11 Daily viewing Daily viewing Picture Adjustment GB Display the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select Picture. Validate . The PICTURE menu is displayed. using Select and set the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Brightness, Colour, Contrast, Sharpness: Select each of these lines one after the other and set as required. Contrast expand : Select this line then choose the desired Contrast expand setting (High or Low). Tone : Select this line then choose the desired colour tone (Warm, Neutral or Cold). Exit the menu using . PICTURE Return Brightness Colour Contrast Sharpness Neutral Cold Contrast expand Tone Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. Sound Settings Display the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select the line marked . The SOUND menu Sound. Validate using is displayed. Select and set the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Sound type : The choices available to you depend on your television model and the broadcast. Stereo, Dual or NICAM reception and the corresponding choices are only available on Stereo or NICAM Stereo televisions. Select this line, then select the type of sound you desire. Sound mode : Select this line, then choose the desired mode using the Left/Right keys. The choices available to you depend on your television model and the type of sound. Magic and Dolby Virtual modes are only available in stereo on TV’s equipped with Virtual Dolby Surround. Stereo wide is only available on Stereo or Nicam televisions not equipped with Virtual Dolby Surround. Balance L/R : Select this line, then balance the sound between the Left and Right loudspeakers. Treble, Bass : Select each of these lines and adjust to suit you. Surround effect : This line appears only if you have selected Dolby Virtual on the Sound mode line. Select this line and adjust the surround effect to suit you. Exit the menu using . SOUND Return Automatic Normal Sound type Sound mode Balance L/R Treble Bass Surround effect Broadcast mono stereo dual NICAM-3 AV Mode Choice automatic - mono mono - stereo sound 1 - sound 2 sound 1 - sound 2 - sound 3 stereo - sound 1 - sound 2 Effect Normal : reproduces the original sound ( mono or stereo). Wide : gives a stereo effect on mono sounds. Stereo wide : accentuates the stereo effect. Magic : accentuates the stereo effects and adds echo. Dolby Virtual : Virtual Dolby Surround. Virtual Surround Dolby is based on Dolby Pro Logic decoding for the reproduction of the Left, Right, Centre and Virtual Surround sound channels using two loudspeakers. “”Dolby”, “”Pro Logic” and the double -D symbol are trademarks of the Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 12 Daily viewing Time Display the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select the line marked . The TIME menu is Time. Validate using displayed. Sleep timer : Use the Left/Right keys to choose how long you wish to view before the television switches off. The television will switch off automatically at the end of this period. To cancel, set to 00:00. One minute before switching off, a message will inform you that the television is about to go off. If you wish to keep it on, press any key on the remote control or the local keyboard. The television switches to Child lock mode after an automatic stop. It can only be switched on again from the remote control. TIME Return Sleep timer 00 : 00 Current time 11 : 28 Wake-up timer Wake-up time Programme number Daily 07 : 07 01 BBC1 GB You can use this menu to switch your television on or off automatically at a set time. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. Current time : The current time is given by the Teletext (see PERSONAL SETTINGS menu). You can also set the time manually using the number keys (0 to 9) on your remote control. Wake-up timer : If you wish to be woken up by your television on the channel of your choice, you must first set the television clock to the correct time (see above). Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box and display the Wake-up timer menu. The lines Wake-up time, Programme number and Daily only appear if you have ticked the box on the line marked Wake-up timer. Wake-up time : Use the number keys (0 to 9) on the remote control to set the time at which you wish to be woken. Programme number : Select the programme you wish to be woken by. Daily : Tick this box if you wish to be awakened at this time every day. . Exit the menu using Set the television to standby using the key on the remote control. The red indicator light on the television flashes. The television will come on automatically at the programmed time and will go off one hour later if you do not use the remote control. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 13 Daily viewing List of Channels GB This list contains up to 10 pages. The number of pages depends on the number of programmes memorized. For each programme, the list indicates the station name or type and the programme number. The 3 AV programmes are listed on page 11. To display the list, press the key on the remote control or key on the remote control. Select the Display the SUMMARY using the . line marked List. Validate using The page displayed is the page containing the programme you are watching. It is identified in the list by the symbol TV. To display the next page, press the Right key. To display the previous page, press the Left key. If you wish to watch one of the programmes on the page displayed: Enter the last digit of the programme number (e.g. for 25 simply enter 5) on the remote control. The list disappears and your programme is selected. Or, - Select the programme using the Up/Down keys. . - Validate using . - Exit the menu using www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 14 LIST Exit 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 BBC 1 BBC 2 FR 3 CC19 ARTE M6 CNN PREM EURO TV Page -/+ Programme: 0 - 9 Daily viewing Selecting Programmes GB For channels 1 to 9, press the number key corresponding to the desired channel on the remote control. For programme numbers higher than 10, press the key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now use the number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit. If you press while ”- -” is already displayed, the display returns to 0- , in which case you can only select programmes 1 to 9. Scrolling the Programmes You can scroll through the programmes using the / keys. Audio-visual (AV) Programmes Press the key to call the last audio-visual (AV) programme watched. Press repeatedly to scroll the audio-visual (AV) programmes on the screen. Volume Control Use the volume +/- keys to increase or decrease the volume. Muting the Sound Press the key to mute the sound. Press again to restore the sound. Zoom (16/9 models only) This function is useful for 4/3 or letterbox pictures (black bands at the top and bottom of the screen). Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired zoom position: ZOOM 0: 4/3 picture (black bands at the sides). FULL SCREEN: for a 4/3 picture that fills the screen. ZOOM 1: for letterbox pictures. Displaying Information Press the of sound. key to display the following information on the screen: channel number and name, time, zoom, type Television Lock You can use this function to prevent anyone from switching on the television using the buttons on the television set. The buttons on the television set are locked in the following cases: - If you switch off the set by pressing and holding the key on the remote control for more than 3 seconds, - After a programmed stop, - If the television is set to standby when the alarm has been set. When the television is locked the red power will be light flashing. The television can now only be operated from the remote control. To release the lock, press any number key on the remote control. Switching Off the Television To switch off the television, press the Standby key on the remote control or press the ON/OFF switch on the television set. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 15 Teletext Teletext GB Certain channels broadcast an electronic news page service with a range of different information services. The presentation and use of the Teletext differ from one country to another and from one programme to another (Teletext, Fastext or Toptext). Press the key to display the Teletext Index (page 100). A message will inform you if the programme you are watching has no Teletext service. To call up a page: Enter the 3 digits of the page number you wish to consult (for example, 150 or 170). After a moment, the page appears. Use the Left/Right keys to consult the next or the previous page. Standard Functions Rolling pages: Some information is displayed over several sub-pages. It is scrolled on your screen as it is received. . Press again to continue To stop scrolling, select STOP using the Up/Down keys and validate using scrolling. Masked text: To reveal a hidden answer (for example in a quiz programme), select ??? using the Up/Down keys and validate . Press again to hide the answers. using Zoom : Select ZOOM using the Up/Down keys then press the key once to magnify the top of the screen, twice to magnify the bottom of the screen (the page will scroll from top to bottom) and a third time to return to the normal display. Display: You can superpose the Teletext page over the TV picture. To do this, select MIX using the Up/Down keys then validate by pressing the key. Press again to return to the normal display. Sub-code: You can use this to access a sub-page directly. Select “- - - -” using the Up/Down keys. Then enter the four digits of the required sub-page number. Certain programmes have Alarm pages that you can set to appear at the time you require. For example: for 15h30 enter 1530 as the sub-page number then press . You must of course leave the television on the programme which is to transmit the Alarm page. Index: To call up the index page, select 100 using the Up/Down keys then validate using . Direct access: You can use the yellow and blue keys to directly access the pages indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen. Fastext functions: If the Teletext you receive is Fastext, a sub-menu at the bottom of the screen appears which you can use to select from the 4 headings according to its colour. To select a heading, press the key of the corresponding colour. Toptext functions: If the Teletext you receive is TOPtext, the pages are arranged into headings and sub-headings by subject. You can select the first page of a heading directly by pressing the blue key, or the first page of a sub-heading by pressing the yellow key. Other functions: With certain Teletext channels, it is possible to have sub-titles overlaid on the screen for certain broadcasts as well as certain news flash updates. The corresponding page number is indicated in the Telextext index. Once you have found the page, the sub-title or the news flash will be overlaid onto the TV picture. key. The navigation status bar disappears after a few seconds. To display it again, press the or . To exit Teletext, press www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 16 Other Connections Other Connections The CINCH Video and Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connect a VHS or 8mm camcorder. The S and CINCH Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connect a S-VHS or Hi-8 camcorder. GB To use the appliance you have connected, press the key several times until the AV3 programme is selected on the screen. When you switch off the connected appliance, the television will remain on the AV3 programme and you must use the numerical keys on the remote control to select a programme. * on models equipped with this function The headphone socket (2)* is provided to connect a headphone or earphones. Connecting headphones mute the sound from the television loudspeakers. Other Possibilities Copying a cassette: Plug the VCR you wish to record to into the SCART socket AV2. Plug the appliance you wish to copy from as follows: into the peripheral jack AV1 for a VCR; into the CINCH AV3 jacks for a camcorder (see table below). RECORD PLAY Appliance * on models equipped with this function SCART Socket Appliance SCART Socket CALL PROGRAMME Peripheral AV1 VCR ou Camcorder AV2 AV1 Cinches or S-Video AV3 VCR ou Camcorder AV2 AV3 VCR Camcorder Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier If you wish to connect a HiFi or AV amplifier, plug it into the peripheral jack AV2 using a SCART-CINCH type lead. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 17 M a n d’ u B e a n l M a n u t i l d t i i s e n l i a a M z t n i G e a v z w r s - g · d i n e a i i z i n s n a i e ó k s n · d i k s l c j · r l u u i o a a r n B u i b · e u l n i n o e a n a l g u l z i n t a z t u i u e s m a i e U u u - g n n · · - · g B e t j e n i n g s - v e j l e d n i n g · DF321E / DF421E F u o t l i h l e i t z o a ç d ã www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr o e · 10 cm 5 cm 10 cm 10 cm www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr About this manual This document is common to several television models. Therefore, certain functions or settings may not apply to the model you have purchased The position of the ON/OFF switch differs depending on the model. It may be located on the front or on the right-hand side of your set (see the drawing inside the cover page of your manual). About safety To ensure your own safety and safe operation of the equipment, observe the following instructions thoroughly. TV sets require sufficient ventilation to prevent their components from overheating, which will cause failure. Do not block the ventilation openings at the rear. If you place your TV set in a special piece of furniture, make sure there is enough space for unhindered air circulation. Do not place the TV set in the close vicinity of a heater. The TV set has been designed for use in dry rooms. Should you use it, in exceptional circumstances in the open air (example: on the balcony, in the veranda or tent), you must absolutely protect it against moisture (dew, rain, splash water). Before switching on a cold TV set in a warm room, you should wait until any condensation in the screen has dried by itself. Maximum ambient temperature: 35°C Maximum humidity: 85% By the end of your TV evening or when away from home for a longer period, we recommend that you turn off the TV set with the On/Off-switch. Even when the On/Off-switch is in the Off-position, your TV set is not fully disconnected from the mains. To disconnect the set completely, the mains plug must be pulled out. The mains plug must be easily accessible. In the following cases, we recommend that you pull out the mains connector: 1. During a thunderstorm. In such a case, it is advisable that you also disconnect the TV set from the aerial socket. 2. When odour or smoke emanates from the set. Never attempt to open your TV set yourself. Further information: The TV set shielding is sufficient to prevent X-radiation to the exterior. Any operation performed by a non skilled person, change of high voltage or replacement of the picture tube by a model not complying with the manufacturer specification are likely to cause considerable increase in X-radiation. A TV set modified in such a way no longer complies with the manufacturers’ specification and must not be used. About cleaning The screen is to be cleaned with liquid glass cleaners. : Never use abrasive products. : Clean the cabinet with a soft cloth soaked with neutral cleaner. Do not use solvents, such as white spirit or alcohol-based cleaning products since they may damage your television. : At regular intervals, clean the ventilation grids at the rear of the TV set. About degaussing The terrestrial magnetic field may have an influence on your TV set. This influence is revealed by the coloured spots, which appear on the screen. Should this be the case: : Turn the equipment off by means of the On/Off-switch. : Wait about one hour before switching the set on again. This procedure performs automatic degaussing of the screen. Should there still be coloured spots on the screen, repeat the operation. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 1 GB About the switch Contents GB Using the remote control and fitting the batteries. How to call up a menu and how to select a function, a setting or an option. About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About degaussing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Basic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Navigation principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Calling up the Installation main menu . . . 5 Calling up the Settings summary . . . . . . . 5 Page Instructions for Use Installation Page 4 Daily viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Picture Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 List of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Selecting Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Scrolling the Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Audio-visual (AV) Programmes . . . . . . 15 Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Muting the Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Zoom (16/9 models only) . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Calling up a Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Displaying Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Navigating within the Menus . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Television Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Installing your television for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Switching Off the Television . . . . . . . . . 15 Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Automatic installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Standard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Programme organisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Other Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Manual programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Other Possibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Personal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier . . . . 17 Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 2 5 Basic connections Basic connections The mains plug (1) supplies power to the television. The television must only be plugged in to a 220-240 V - 50 Hz power supply. It must never be plugged in to a DC source. If the plug comes away from the lead, never attempt to plug it in: this could cause electrocution. Continental Europe If you connect an appliance to the aerial jack, you must give it a channel number. To do this, switch on the appliance, then use the television to find the modulator channel (see the appliance manual). Now give it a programme number and memorise it (see Manual Programming of channels). Then, when you wish to use the appliance, simply select its programme number on the television. This procedure is not required for VCR’s not equipped with a modulator. GB The aerial socket (2), located on the rear of the television, can be used to connect an external aerial or other appliance equipped with a modulator such as a VCR, satellite receiver, etc. United Kingdom The plug is fitted with a fuse which protects your television. If your television does not work, the fuse may be blown. In this case, replace it with an identical 5 Amp ASTA or lr BSI (BS 1362) certified fuse. $ The SCART socket AV1 (3), located on the rear of the television, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder (VHS, 8 mm), a Canal+ decoder, a video games console or RGB-signal emitting appliances. The SCART socket AV2 (3), located on the rear of the television, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder (VHS, 8 mm, S-VHS or Hi-8). Note: the mains lead of your television is fitted with a moulded plug. This lead contains all the safety equipment, so you are advised when replacing it not to use a non-specific commercially-available model. We strongly recommend the use of this type of connection, which gives a better picture quality. To use the peripheral appliance that you have connected, press the AV key on your remote control (press once to select AV1; twice to select AV2; three times for AV3: see ”Other Connections”). This selection is automatic for some appliances. Pressing “”play” on a VCR, or switching on a satellite receiver connected to AV1 or AV2 will automatically switch on your television. When you stop the VCR, if you have not changed channels while watching the VCR, the television automatically switches back to the channel you were watching beforehand. If the television has been switched on from the VCR, it switches to standby when the VCR is switched off. The television automatically switches to 16/9 format if the connected appliance delivers the corresponding signal. 2 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 3 Remote control Remote control Display of channel, time, sound (yellow This key is active only when using the Teletext (blue key) button) (and zoom for models with zoom) Call up programme list Standby GB (green button) Call up Teletext / Toptext / Fastext function (purple button) Reminder of picture preferences (red button) Right/Left Selection within menus and Zoom Function (for models with this function) Confirm an action or validate a menu option Go to adjustment function MENU To leave a menu or Teletext Move Up/Down in menus Volume adjustment Change programme Sound mute 8 Go to programmes and enter numerical values in menus Selecting appliances connected to the television (AV1, AV2 ...) For programme numbers higher than 10, press the 0 key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now use the number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit. The red, green, yellow and blue keys are also used for the Teletext. Please respect the environment! Before throwing any batteries away, consult your distributor who may be able to take them back for specific recycling. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 4 Navigation principles Navigation principles Calling up the Installation main menu INSTALLATION MAIN MENU If there is no menu displayed on the screen, key on the remote press and hold the control. The settings SUMMARY is displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU which you can use to operate your television. Exit Manual programming Auto installation GB Programme organisation Personal settings Calling up the Settings summary SUMMARY Press and release the key on the remote control to display the list of menus available for using your television functions or adjusting your television Exit Teletext Picture Sound Calling up a Menu List Select the menu you wish using the Up/Down key to validate.. keys. Press the Time Preferences Navigating within the Menus Use the Up/Down keys 1 to select a line. Use the Left/Right keys 2 to: - Increase or decrease a value: for example: Fine tuning - Select an option: Aerial for example: Reception Cable Reception - Activate or deactivate an option: for example: Decoder - Access a sub-menu: for example: Picture preferences You can use the 3 MANUAL PROGRAMMING Return Standard Reception Autosearch Fine tuning Store on PR number Name Decoder External sound path EURO BG Cable CH- ----- Enter channel number or start autosearch with < or >. key to: - Activate or deactivate an option: for example: Decoder - Access a sub-menu: for example: Picture preferences - Validate an action: for example: Store on PR number Use the 4 key to exit a menu. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 5 Installing your television for the first time Installing your television for the first time First plug the television into a mains power outlet and to the external aerial or a cable network, then switch on using located on the front or the side of your set. the ON/OFF switch When you switch on your television for the first time, the language selection menu* is displayed (Fig. 1). If this does key on the television until this menu appears. not happen, set the television to standby then press and hold the GB Installation Instructions (start) 1. Use the Up/Down keys to select the language in which you wish the menus to be displayed. . 2. Then validate using 3. A list of countries* is now displayed (Fig. 2). Select the country in which you live, or the country from which you wish to receive the broadcasts if you live in a border area. . 4. Then validate using 5. A welcome message is displayed. 6. Run the automatic installation sequence . using 7. A message appears to inform you that automatic installation has started (Fig. 3). Wait for a few minutes. A new message will inform you when automatic installation is completed. 8. If you wish to check or modify the channel and see the organisation, press Programme organisation chapter. If you do not wish to modify the channel organisation, you can exit the menu by then watch the channel of pressing your choice. Choose the desired channel using the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the / keys. If you have a decoder, see the Manual programming chapter. Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the country you have selected. See the Manual channel programming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, read the Automatic channel installation chapter to install any channels not found. (Fig. 1) English Français Deutsch Italiano Español Português Nederlands Svenska Dansk Norwisch (Fig. 2) OK COUNTRY SELECTION Exit United Kingdom Eire France Germany Italy Spain Portugal Holland Belgium and Luxembourg Switzerland Austria Sweden Denmark Norway Other Select your country and press OK (Fig. 3) SEARCHING *The list of languages and countries may vary from one model to another. Installation Instructions (end) AUTO INSTALLATION 003 STATIONS FOUND Searching for TV stations. Please wait. To cancel press EXIT. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 6 Automatic installation Automatic installation The Automatic installation function is useful if you have to go through the installation procedure again, such as when moving house. This function deletes all previously memorised programmes. To install a new channel, you should use the Manual programming function. Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the selected country, so see the Manual programming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, if you have not found certain channels, select Other instead of a country name in the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu, then run automatic installation again. INSTALLATION MAIN MENU 1. Press and hold the key on the remote control to display the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU (The SUMMARY appears first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU). 2. Select the Auto installation line. 3. Validate using Exit Manual programming Auto installation Programme organisation Personal settings . A message will inform you that Automatic installation has begun. Wait for a few minutes. A new message will inform you when Automatic installation is completed. SEARCHING If you wish to check or reorganize your channel key and see the display, press the Programme organisation chapter. AUTO INSTALLATION If you do not wish to reorganize your programmes, you can exit this menu by , then watch the programme of pressing your choice. Choose the desired programme using the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the / keys. 003 STATIONS FOUND Searching for TV stations. Please wait. To cancel press EXIT. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 7 GB Before running AUTO INSTALLATION, check the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu to ensure that the country displayed is correct. Programme organisation Programme organisation During automatic installation, your television will search for the channel name and assign it a programme number according to the selected country. You can use the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION menu to name any channel name not found, to change the order in which the channels are displayed, or to delete channels for which reception is too poor. Follow the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below. GB If you wish to access the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION, menu thereafter, first press and hold key on the remote control to the display the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU (the SUMMARY is displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU) then select Programme . organisation and validate using - To delete a programme for which reception is too poor: 1. Select the line marked Select program. / or Left/Right keys to list 2. Use the your channels. 3. When you get to a channel you wish to delete, select the line marked Delete program. to delete the programme. 4. Press . 5. .Validate using - To organize your channels to suit you: 1. Select the line marked Select program.. 2. Use the / or Left/Right keys and the programmes logos to find the programme to which you wish to give the No.1. Its present number appears on the line marked Select program.. 3. Select the line marked Swap with PR. 4. Enter 01. . The two programmes swap 5. Press position and the desired programme becomes N°1. 6. Repeat the above procedure for the other channels. INSTALLATION MAIN MENU Exit Manual programming Auto installation Programme organisation Personal settings PROGRAMME ORGANISATION Return Select program. Swap with PR. Change pr. name Delete program. 13 -EURO 13 MTV FR2 TF1 EURO CH40 CC01 ARTE CART ---ARD Select programme number using PR-/PR+ or </> or 0 to 9 keys. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. - To name your channels: 1. Select the line marked Change pr. name 2. Select the character you wish to modify using the Left/Right keys. 3. Use the and keys to display the letter you require. The name you have entered will be memorised when you move to another line or exit the menu. If you wish to change the order in which your programmes are displayed or if you wish to name other programmes, repeat the procedures described above. When you have finished organizing the . programmes, exit the menu using www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Manual programming Manual programming The manual installation function is useful if some programmes have not been installed even after AUTOMATIC INSTALLATION. , the SUMMARY is 1. Press and hold displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU. 2. Select the line marked Manual programming. . 3. Display the menu using 4. Now continue by following the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below. Standard : Select the standard using Left/Right keys that corresponds to your country from the list of standards. The number of standards proposed will differ from one model to another. France for France and Luxemburg DKK’ eg. for Eastern Europe and the Middle-East I for the United Kingdom and Ireland Euro BG for Western Europe INSTALLATION MAIN MENU Exit Manual programming GB Auto installation Programme organisation Personal settings MANUAL PROGRAMMING Return Standard Reception Autosearch Fine tuning Store on PR number Name Decoder External sound path EURO BG Cable CH- ----- Reception : Your television can pick up channels either via Enter channel number or start an aerial (RF channels) or via a cable network. autosearch with < or >. Certain cable networks use the same frequencies as the RF channels. If this is the case, you must select Aerial instead of Cable. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous Autosearch : Enter the programme number if you know it. If not, search using the Left/Right keys. Your television will stop at the first channel it tunes into. If you wish to memorize it, go to the line marked Store on PR number. If not, resume the search using the Left/Right keys. Fine tuning : You can use this to improve the picture if the transmitter frequency is out of adjustment. Use the Left/Right keys to obtain the best possible picture and sound. Store on PR number : . Enter the programme number you wish to give the channel (e.g.: 01 for BBC1). Memorise using Name : If the station has been identified by the transmitter, its name will be inscribed automatically. You can change the proposed name or enter it if it has not already been identified. Select the character you wish to modify using the Left/Right keys. Use the or keys to display the character you desire. Decoder : Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box if the channel is coded and if a decoder is connected to the AV1 jack. External sound path : Switch on your decoder. If the sound is coded or if you have no sound, activate or deactivate the box as required using the Left/Right keys. Once you have made all the adjustments you wish to a programme, go to Store on PR number and press to memorise these. Then move on to the next channel. Once you have completed your Manual Programming, exit the menu using . www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 9 Personal settings Personal settings GB 1. Press and hold the key: the SUMMARY is displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU. 2. Select the line marked Personal settings. INSTALLATION MAIN MENU Exit Manual programming 3. Display the menu using . 4. Continue by following the messages at the bottom of the screen. Auto installation For further details, read the information below. Personal settings Menu language : Select the language in which the menus are to be displayed. PERSONAL SETTINGS Country : Indicate the country in which you are if you wish to rerun Automatic Programming. For cable networks, if certain channels have not been found, select Other instead of the country name before running automatic installation again. You may find that the characters of certain teletext languages are inaccessible for the selected country. Auto volume level : This is a sound control function which aims to equalise the volume level between different channels, and between different programmes on the same channel. Activate or deactivate the auto volume level as required. Programme organisation Return Menu language English Country UK Auto volume level AV1 name AV2 name AV3 name VCR ---CAMC Prog. to be used for reference time 06 Select a station from which you want to get the reference time. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. On models equipped with Virtual Dolby Surround, this function remains inactive if Dolby Virtual has been selected in the SOUND menu (see Volume Control). AV1, AV2, AV3 name : Use these to give a name to each of your audio-visual programmes. Select the character you wish to modify using the Left/Right keys. or keys to display the desired Use the character. Prog. to be used for reference time : key or to use To display the time using the the alarm function, the television clock must be set to the correct time. Select the line marked Prog. to be used for reference time and select a channel which broadcasts teletext. The time is set automatically and is displayed after the channel number. Exit the menu using . www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 10 13:15 Preferences Preferences 1. Display the SUMMARY by pressing and releasing the key on the remote control . 2. Select the line marked Preferences. . 3. Display the menu using Show program. number : If you wish to permanently display the number of the programme you are watching, tick the box using the Left/Right keys. Press the Left/Right keys again to deactivate this function. PREFERENCES Return Show program. number AV2 video input AV3 video input Format control Picture preferences GB Make your choice from the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Video S-Video Auto AV2 video input : Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV2 SCART socket (Video or S-Video). AV3 video input : Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV3 sockets (these sockets are located on the front or the side of the television). Format control : Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired picture format: Auto : if the transmitter (for 16/9 format TV’s) or the appliance connected to one of the peripheral jacks delivers the switching signal, the television automatically adapts to the transmitted picture format. 16/9 : manually selects widescreen picture format. 4/3 : manually selects this picture format. If you have selected 16/9 or 4/3, the television will switch back to Auto when you change channels or you switch off. Picture preferences : To access the PICTURE PREFERENCES . menu, press If you wish, you can personalize certain picture settings. Select and set the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Settings : Select Standard or Personal. Standard corresponds to the factory settings. Personal corresponds to the settings that you have entered yourself. The lines Brightness, Colour and Contrast are displayed only if you have selected Personal on the Settings line. Select each line one after the other and enter your required settings. You can recall these picture settings by pressing the red key on the remote control. . Exit the menu using PICTURE PREFERENCES Return Settings Brightness Colour Contrast Personal Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 11 Daily viewing Daily viewing Picture Adjustment GB Display the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select Picture. Validate . The PICTURE menu is displayed. using Select and set the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Brightness, Colour, Contrast, Sharpness: Select each of these lines one after the other and set as required. Contrast expand : Select this line then choose the desired Contrast expand setting (High or Low). Tone : Select this line then choose the desired colour tone (Warm, Neutral or Cold). Exit the menu using . PICTURE Return Brightness Colour Contrast Sharpness Neutral Cold Contrast expand Tone Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. Sound Settings Display the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select the line marked . The SOUND menu Sound. Validate using is displayed. Select and set the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Sound type : The choices available to you depend on your television model and the broadcast. Stereo, Dual or NICAM reception and the corresponding choices are only available on Stereo or NICAM Stereo televisions. Select this line, then select the type of sound you desire. Sound mode : Select this line, then choose the desired mode using the Left/Right keys. The choices available to you depend on your television model and the type of sound. Magic and Dolby Virtual modes are only available in stereo on TV’s equipped with Virtual Dolby Surround. Stereo wide is only available on Stereo or Nicam televisions not equipped with Virtual Dolby Surround. Balance L/R : Select this line, then balance the sound between the Left and Right loudspeakers. Treble, Bass : Select each of these lines and adjust to suit you. Surround effect : This line appears only if you have selected Dolby Virtual on the Sound mode line. Select this line and adjust the surround effect to suit you. Exit the menu using . SOUND Return Automatic Normal Sound type Sound mode Balance L/R Treble Bass Surround effect Broadcast mono stereo dual NICAM-3 AV Mode Choice automatic - mono mono - stereo sound 1 - sound 2 sound 1 - sound 2 - sound 3 stereo - sound 1 - sound 2 Effect Normal : reproduces the original sound ( mono or stereo). Wide : gives a stereo effect on mono sounds. Stereo wide : accentuates the stereo effect. Magic : accentuates the stereo effects and adds echo. Dolby Virtual : Virtual Dolby Surround. Virtual Surround Dolby is based on Dolby Pro Logic decoding for the reproduction of the Left, Right, Centre and Virtual Surround sound channels using two loudspeakers. “”Dolby”, “”Pro Logic” and the double -D symbol are trademarks of the Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 12 Daily viewing Time Display the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select the line marked . The TIME menu is Time. Validate using displayed. Sleep timer : Use the Left/Right keys to choose how long you wish to view before the television switches off. The television will switch off automatically at the end of this period. To cancel, set to 00:00. One minute before switching off, a message will inform you that the television is about to go off. If you wish to keep it on, press any key on the remote control or the local keyboard. The television switches to Child lock mode after an automatic stop. It can only be switched on again from the remote control. TIME Return Sleep timer 00 : 00 Current time 11 : 28 Wake-up timer Wake-up time Programme number Daily 07 : 07 01 BBC1 GB You can use this menu to switch your television on or off automatically at a set time. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. Current time : The current time is given by the Teletext (see PERSONAL SETTINGS menu). You can also set the time manually using the number keys (0 to 9) on your remote control. Wake-up timer : If you wish to be woken up by your television on the channel of your choice, you must first set the television clock to the correct time (see above). Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box and display the Wake-up timer menu. The lines Wake-up time, Programme number and Daily only appear if you have ticked the box on the line marked Wake-up timer. Wake-up time : Use the number keys (0 to 9) on the remote control to set the time at which you wish to be woken. Programme number : Select the programme you wish to be woken by. Daily : Tick this box if you wish to be awakened at this time every day. . Exit the menu using Set the television to standby using the key on the remote control. The red indicator light on the television flashes. The television will come on automatically at the programmed time and will go off one hour later if you do not use the remote control. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 13 Daily viewing List of Channels GB This list contains up to 10 pages. The number of pages depends on the number of programmes memorized. For each programme, the list indicates the station name or type and the programme number. The 3 AV programmes are listed on page 11. To display the list, press the key on the remote control or key on the remote control. Select the Display the SUMMARY using the . line marked List. Validate using The page displayed is the page containing the programme you are watching. It is identified in the list by the symbol TV. To display the next page, press the Right key. To display the previous page, press the Left key. If you wish to watch one of the programmes on the page displayed: Enter the last digit of the programme number (e.g. for 25 simply enter 5) on the remote control. The list disappears and your programme is selected. Or, - Select the programme using the Up/Down keys. . - Validate using . - Exit the menu using www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 14 LIST Exit 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 BBC 1 BBC 2 FR 3 CC19 ARTE M6 CNN PREM EURO TV Page -/+ Programme: 0 - 9 Daily viewing Selecting Programmes GB For channels 1 to 9, press the number key corresponding to the desired channel on the remote control. For programme numbers higher than 10, press the key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now use the number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit. If you press while ”- -” is already displayed, the display returns to 0- , in which case you can only select programmes 1 to 9. Scrolling the Programmes You can scroll through the programmes using the / keys. Audio-visual (AV) Programmes Press the key to call the last audio-visual (AV) programme watched. Press repeatedly to scroll the audio-visual (AV) programmes on the screen. Volume Control Use the volume +/- keys to increase or decrease the volume. Muting the Sound Press the key to mute the sound. Press again to restore the sound. Zoom (16/9 models only) This function is useful for 4/3 or letterbox pictures (black bands at the top and bottom of the screen). Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired zoom position: ZOOM 0: 4/3 picture (black bands at the sides). FULL SCREEN: for a 4/3 picture that fills the screen. ZOOM 1: for letterbox pictures. Displaying Information Press the of sound. key to display the following information on the screen: channel number and name, time, zoom, type Television Lock You can use this function to prevent anyone from switching on the television using the buttons on the television set. The buttons on the television set are locked in the following cases: - If you switch off the set by pressing and holding the key on the remote control for more than 3 seconds, - After a programmed stop, - If the television is set to standby when the alarm has been set. When the television is locked the red power will be light flashing. The television can now only be operated from the remote control. To release the lock, press any number key on the remote control. Switching Off the Television To switch off the television, press the Standby key on the remote control or press the ON/OFF switch on the television set. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 15 Teletext Teletext GB Certain channels broadcast an electronic news page service with a range of different information services. The presentation and use of the Teletext differ from one country to another and from one programme to another (Teletext, Fastext or Toptext). Press the key to display the Teletext Index (page 100). A message will inform you if the programme you are watching has no Teletext service. To call up a page: Enter the 3 digits of the page number you wish to consult (for example, 150 or 170). After a moment, the page appears. Use the Left/Right keys to consult the next or the previous page. Standard Functions Rolling pages: Some information is displayed over several sub-pages. It is scrolled on your screen as it is received. . Press again to continue To stop scrolling, select STOP using the Up/Down keys and validate using scrolling. Masked text: To reveal a hidden answer (for example in a quiz programme), select ??? using the Up/Down keys and validate . Press again to hide the answers. using Zoom : Select ZOOM using the Up/Down keys then press the key once to magnify the top of the screen, twice to magnify the bottom of the screen (the page will scroll from top to bottom) and a third time to return to the normal display. Display: You can superpose the Teletext page over the TV picture. To do this, select MIX using the Up/Down keys then validate by pressing the key. Press again to return to the normal display. Sub-code: You can use this to access a sub-page directly. Select “- - - -” using the Up/Down keys. Then enter the four digits of the required sub-page number. Certain programmes have Alarm pages that you can set to appear at the time you require. For example: for 15h30 enter 1530 as the sub-page number then press . You must of course leave the television on the programme which is to transmit the Alarm page. Index: To call up the index page, select 100 using the Up/Down keys then validate using . Direct access: You can use the yellow and blue keys to directly access the pages indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen. Fastext functions: If the Teletext you receive is Fastext, a sub-menu at the bottom of the screen appears which you can use to select from the 4 headings according to its colour. To select a heading, press the key of the corresponding colour. Toptext functions: If the Teletext you receive is TOPtext, the pages are arranged into headings and sub-headings by subject. You can select the first page of a heading directly by pressing the blue key, or the first page of a sub-heading by pressing the yellow key. Other functions: With certain Teletext channels, it is possible to have sub-titles overlaid on the screen for certain broadcasts as well as certain news flash updates. The corresponding page number is indicated in the Telextext index. Once you have found the page, the sub-title or the news flash will be overlaid onto the TV picture. key. The navigation status bar disappears after a few seconds. To display it again, press the or . To exit Teletext, press www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 16 Other Connections Other Connections The CINCH Video and Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connect a VHS or 8mm camcorder. The S and CINCH Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connect a S-VHS or Hi-8 camcorder. GB To use the appliance you have connected, press the key several times until the AV3 programme is selected on the screen. When you switch off the connected appliance, the television will remain on the AV3 programme and you must use the numerical keys on the remote control to select a programme. * on models equipped with this function The headphone socket (2)* is provided to connect a headphone or earphones. Connecting headphones mute the sound from the television loudspeakers. Other Possibilities Copying a cassette: Plug the VCR you wish to record to into the SCART socket AV2. Plug the appliance you wish to copy from as follows: into the peripheral jack AV1 for a VCR; into the CINCH AV3 jacks for a camcorder (see table below). RECORD PLAY Appliance * on models equipped with this function SCART Socket Appliance SCART Socket CALL PROGRAMME Peripheral AV1 VCR ou Camcorder AV2 AV1 Cinches or S-Video AV3 VCR ou Camcorder AV2 AV3 VCR Camcorder Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier If you wish to connect a HiFi or AV amplifier, plug it into the peripheral jack AV2 using a SCART-CINCH type lead. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 17 M a d’ u t B e d n i n l M a n u t l i u l i a n u i t e a l z a z e t n a t G i e z a B r v j v e j l F o l h u t i d i n e k i a i e n t o z a e ó n s - n g n - n n d e l i i n i r z n e l g o c s s t j k e i i i u B n d a u w i - l z r n s a a i b g u u l n e n n o e a M l i u s m a s e U u i i a u g g s i ç - n g d e ã o 2 8 W S 2 3 E 3 2 W S 2 3 E www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 10 cm 5 cm 10 cm 10 cm www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr About this manual This document is common to several television models. Therefore, certain functions or settings may not apply to the model you have purchased The position of the ON/OFF switch differs depending on the model. It may be located on the front or on the right-hand side of your set (see the drawing inside the cover page of your manual). About safety To ensure your own safety and safe operation of the equipment, observe the following instructions thoroughly. TV sets require sufficient ventilation to prevent their components from overheating, which will cause failure. Do not block the ventilation openings at the rear. If you place your TV set in a special piece of furniture, make sure there is enough space for unhindered air circulation. Do not place the TV set in the close vicinity of a heater. The TV set has been designed for use in dry rooms. Should you use it, in exceptional circumstances in the open air (example: on the balcony, in the veranda or tent), you must absolutely protect it against moisture (dew, rain, splash water). Before switching on a cold TV set in a warm room, you should wait until any condensation in the screen has dried by itself. Maximum ambient temperature: 35°C Maximum humidity: 85% By the end of your TV evening or when away from home for a longer period, we recommend that you turn off the TV set with the On/Off-switch. Even when the On/Off-switch is in the Off-position, your TV set is not fully disconnected from the mains. To disconnect the set completely, the mains plug must be pulled out. The mains plug must be easily accessible. In the following cases, we recommend that you pull out the mains connector: 1. During a thunderstorm. In such a case, it is advisable that you also disconnect the TV set from the aerial socket. 2. When odour or smoke emanates from the set. Never attempt to open your TV set yourself. Further information: The TV set shielding is sufficient to prevent X-radiation to the exterior. Any operation performed by a non skilled person, change of high voltage or replacement of the picture tube by a model not complying with the manufacturer specification are likely to cause considerable increase in X-radiation. A TV set modified in such a way no longer complies with the manufacturers’ specification and must not be used. About cleaning The screen is to be cleaned with liquid glass cleaners. : Never use abrasive products. : Clean the cabinet with a soft cloth soaked with neutral cleaner. Do not use solvents, such as white spirit or alcohol-based cleaning products since they may damage your television. : At regular intervals, clean the ventilation grids at the rear of the TV set. About degaussing The terrestrial magnetic field may have an influence on your TV set. This influence is revealed by the coloured spots, which appear on the screen. Should this be the case: : Turn the equipment off by means of the On/Off-switch. : Wait about one hour before switching the set on again. This procedure performs automatic degaussing of the screen. Should there still be coloured spots on the screen, repeat the operation. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 1 GB About the switch Contents GB Using the remote control and fitting the batteries. How to call up a menu and how to select a function, a setting or an option. About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 About degaussing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Basic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Navigation principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Calling up the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Calling up the SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Calling up a Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Navigating within the Menus . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Page Instructions for Use Installation Page 4 5 Daily viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Picture Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 List of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Selecting Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Scrolling the Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Audio-visual (AV) Programmes . . . . . . 15 Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Muting the Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Zoom (16/9 models only) . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Displaying Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Television Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Switching Off the Television . . . . . . . . . 15 Installing your television for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Automatic installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Standard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Programme organisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Other Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Manual programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Other Possibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier . . . . 17 Personal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 2 C17 / BASIC / 4000 / GB-TBA / I 6.3 / B Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Basic connections Basic connections The mains plug (1) supplies power to the television. The television must only be plugged in to a 220-240 V - 50 Hz power supply. It must never be plugged in to a DC source. If the plug comes away from the lead, never attempt to plug it in: this could cause electrocution. Continental Europe If you connect an appliance to the aerial jack, you must give it a channel number. To do this, switch on the appliance, then use the television to find the modulator channel (see the appliance manual). Now give it a programme number and memorise it (see Manual Programming of channels). Then, when you wish to use the appliance, simply select its programme number on the television. This procedure is not required for VCR’s not equipped with a modulator. GB The aerial socket (2), located on the rear of the television, can be used to connect an external aerial or other appliance equipped with a modulator such as a VCR, satellite receiver, etc. United Kingdom The plug is fitted with a fuse which protects your television. If your television does not work, the fuse may be blown. In this case, replace it with an identical 5 Amp ASTA or lr BSI (BS 1362) certified fuse. $ The SCART socket AV1 (3), located on the rear of the television, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder (VHS, 8 mm), a Canal+ decoder, a video games console or RGB-signal emitting appliances. The SCART socket AV2 (3), located on the rear of the television, is intended to connect a VCR or a camcorder (VHS, 8 mm, S-VHS or Hi-8). Note: the mains lead of your television is fitted with a moulded plug. This lead contains all the safety equipment, so you are advised when replacing it not to use a non-specific commercially-available model. We strongly recommend the use of this type of connection, which gives a better picture quality. To use the peripheral appliance that you have connected, press the AV key on your remote control (press once to select AV1; twice to select AV2; three times for AV3: see ”Other Connections”). This selection is automatic for some appliances. Pressing “”play” on a VCR, or switching on a satellite receiver connected to AV1 or AV2 will automatically switch on your television. When you stop the VCR, if you have not changed channels while watching the VCR, the television automatically switches back to the channel you were watching beforehand. If the television has been switched on from the VCR, it switches to standby when the VCR is switched off. The television automatically switches to 16/9 format if the connected appliance delivers the corresponding signal. 2 www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 3 Remote control Remote control Display of channel, time, sound This key is active only when using the Teletext (blue key) (yellow button) (and zoom for models with zoom) GB Standby Call up Teletext / Toptext / Fastext function (purple button) Call up programme list (green button) Right/Left Selection within Reminder of picture preferences (red button) menus and Zoom Function (for models with this function) Illumination of remote control Confirm an action or validate buttons a menu option To leave a menu or Teletext Go to adjustment function MENU Volume adjustment Move Up/Down in menus Sound mute Change programme Go to programmes and enter numerical values in menus Selecting appliances connected to the television For programme numbers higher than 10, press the 0 key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now use the number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit. (AV1, AV2 ...) The red, green, yellow and blue keys are also used for the Teletext. Please respect the environment! Before throwing any batteries away, consult your distributor who may be able to take them back for specific recycling. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr Navigation principles Navigation principles Calling up the Installation main menu INSTALLATION MAIN MENU If there is no menu displayed on the screen, key on the remote press and hold the control. The settings SUMMARY is displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU which you can use to operate your television. Exit Manual programming Auto installation GB Programme organisation Personal settings Calling up the Settings summary SUMMARY Press and release the key on the remote control to display the list of menus available for using your television functions or adjusting your television Exit Teletext Picture Sound Calling up a Menu List Select the menu you wish using the Up/Down key to validate.. keys. Press the Time Preferences Navigating within the Menus Use the Up/Down keys 1 to select a line. Use the Left/Right keys 2 to: - Increase or decrease a value: for example: Fine tuning - Select an option: Aerial for example: Reception Cable Reception - Activate or deactivate an option: for example: Decoder - Access a sub-menu: for example: Picture preferences You can use the 3 MANUAL PROGRAMMING Return Standard Reception Autosearch Fine tuning Store on PR number Name Decoder External sound path EURO BG Cable CH- ----- Enter channel number or start autosearch with < or >. key to: - Activate or deactivate an option: for example: Decoder - Access a sub-menu: for example: Picture preferences - Validate an action: for example: Store on PR number Use the 4 key to exit a menu. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 5 Installing your television for the first time Installing your television for the first time First plug the television into a mains power outlet and to the external aerial or a cable network, then switch on using located on the front or the side of your set. the ON/OFF switch When you switch on your television for the first time, the language selection menu* is displayed (Fig. 1). If this does key on the television until this menu appears. not happen, set the television to standby then press and hold the GB Installation Instructions (start) 1. Use the Up/Down keys to select the language in which you wish the menus to be displayed. . 2. Then validate using 3. A list of countries* is now displayed (Fig. 2). Select the country in which you live, or the country from which you wish to receive the broadcasts if you live in a border area. . 4. Then validate using 5. A welcome message is displayed. 6. Run the automatic installation sequence . using 7. A message appears to inform you that automatic installation has started (Fig. 3). Wait for a few minutes. A new message will inform you when automatic installation is completed. 8. If you wish to check or modify the channel and see the organisation, press Programme organisation chapter. If you do not wish to modify the channel organisation, you can exit the menu by then watch the channel of pressing your choice. Choose the desired channel using the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the / keys. If you have a decoder, see the Manual programming chapter. Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the country you have selected. See the Manual channel programming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, read the Automatic channel installation chapter to install any channels not found. (Fig. 1) English Français Deutsch Italiano Español Português Nederlands Svenska Dansk Norwisch (Fig. 2) OK COUNTRY SELECTION Exit United Kingdom Eire France Germany Italy Spain Portugal Holland Belgium and Luxembourg Switzerland Austria Sweden Denmark Norway Other Select your country and press OK (Fig. 3) SEARCHING *The list of languages and countries may vary from one model to another. Installation Instructions (end) AUTO INSTALLATION 003 STATIONS FOUND Searching for TV stations. Please wait. To cancel press EXIT. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 6 Automatic installation Automatic installation The Automatic installation function is useful if you have to go through the installation procedure again, such as when moving house. This function deletes all previously memorised programmes. To install a new channel, you should use the Manual programming function. Your television will only search for channels corresponding to the selected country, so see the Manual programming chapter to install any channels not found. For cable networks, if you have not found certain channels, select Other instead of a country name in the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu, then run automatic installation again. INSTALLATION MAIN MENU 1. Press and hold the key on the remote control to display the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU (The SUMMARY appears first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU). 2. Select the Auto installation line. 3. Validate using Exit Manual programming Auto installation Programme organisation Personal settings . A message will inform you that Automatic installation has begun. Wait for a few minutes. A new message will inform you when Automatic installation is completed. SEARCHING If you wish to check or reorganize your channel key and see the display, press the Programme organisation chapter. AUTO INSTALLATION If you do not wish to reorganize your programmes, you can exit this menu by , then watch the programme of pressing your choice. Choose the desired programme using the number keys (1, 2, 3, ...) and the / keys. 003 STATIONS FOUND Searching for TV stations. Please wait. To cancel press EXIT. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 7 GB Before running AUTO INSTALLATION, check the PERSONAL SETTINGS menu to ensure that the country displayed is correct. Programme organisation Programme organisation During automatic installation, your television will search for the channel name and assign it a programme number according to the selected country. You can use the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION menu to name any channel name not found, to change the order in which the channels are displayed, or to delete channels for which reception is too poor. Follow the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below. GB If you wish to access the PROGRAMME ORGANISATION, menu thereafter, first press and hold key on the remote control to the display the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU (the SUMMARY is displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU) then select Programme . organisation and validate using - To delete a programme for which reception is too poor: 1. Select the line marked Select program. / or Left/Right keys to list 2. Use the your channels. 3. When you get to a channel you wish to delete, select the line marked Delete program. to delete the programme. 4. Press . 5. .Validate using - To organize your channels to suit you: 1. Select the line marked Select program.. 2. Use the / or Left/Right keys and the programmes logos to find the programme to which you wish to give the No.1. Its present number appears on the line marked Select program.. 3. Select the line marked Swap with PR. 4. Enter 01. . The two programmes swap 5. Press position and the desired programme becomes N°1. 6. Repeat the above procedure for the other channels. INSTALLATION MAIN MENU Exit Manual programming Auto installation Programme organisation Personal settings PROGRAMME ORGANISATION Return Select program. Swap with PR. Change pr. name Delete program. 13 -EURO 13 MTV FR2 TF1 EURO CH40 CC01 ARTE CART ---ARD Select programme number using PR-/PR+ or </> or 0 to 9 keys. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. - To name your channels: 1. Select the line marked Change pr. name 2. Select the character you wish to modify using the Left/Right keys. 3. Use the and keys to display the letter you require. The name you have entered will be memorised when you move to another line or exit the menu. If you wish to change the order in which your programmes are displayed or if you wish to name other programmes, repeat the procedures described above. When you have finished organizing the . programmes, exit the menu using www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Manual programming Manual programming The manual installation function is useful if some programmes have not been installed even after AUTOMATIC INSTALLATION. , the SUMMARY is 1. Press and hold displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU. 2. Select the line marked Manual programming. . 3. Display the menu using 4. Now continue by following the messages at the bottom of the screen. For further details, read the information below. Standard : Select the standard using Left/Right keys that corresponds to your country from the list of standards. The number of standards proposed will differ from one model to another. France for France and Luxemburg DKK’ eg. for Eastern Europe and the Middle-East I for the United Kingdom and Ireland Euro BG for Western Europe INSTALLATION MAIN MENU Exit Manual programming GB Auto installation Programme organisation Personal settings MANUAL PROGRAMMING Return Standard Reception Autosearch Fine tuning Store on PR number Name Decoder External sound path EURO BG Cable CH- ----- Reception : Your television can pick up channels either via Enter channel number or start an aerial (RF channels) or via a cable network. autosearch with < or >. Certain cable networks use the same frequencies as the RF channels. If this is the case, you must select Aerial instead of Cable. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous Autosearch : Enter the programme number if you know it. If not, search using the Left/Right keys. Your television will stop at the first channel it tunes into. If you wish to memorize it, go to the line marked Store on PR number. If not, resume the search using the Left/Right keys. Fine tuning : You can use this to improve the picture if the transmitter frequency is out of adjustment. Use the Left/Right keys to obtain the best possible picture and sound. Store on PR number : . Enter the programme number you wish to give the channel (e.g.: 01 for BBC1). Memorise using Name : If the station has been identified by the transmitter, its name will be inscribed automatically. You can change the proposed name or enter it if it has not already been identified. Select the character you wish to modify using the Left/Right keys. Use the or keys to display the character you desire. Decoder : Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box if the channel is coded and if a decoder is connected to the AV1 jack. External sound path : Switch on your decoder. If the sound is coded or if you have no sound, activate or deactivate the box as required using the Left/Right keys. Once you have made all the adjustments you wish to a programme, go to Store on PR number and press to memorise these. Then move on to the next channel. Once you have completed your Manual Programming, exit the menu using . www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 9 Personal settings Personal settings GB 1. Press and hold the key: the SUMMARY is displayed first, followed by the INSTALLATION MAIN MENU. 2. Select the line marked Personal settings. INSTALLATION MAIN MENU Exit Manual programming 3. Display the menu using . 4. Continue by following the messages at the bottom of the screen. Auto installation For further details, read the information below. Personal settings Menu language : Select the language in which the menus are to be displayed. PERSONAL SETTINGS Country : Indicate the country in which you are if you wish to rerun Automatic Programming. For cable networks, if certain channels have not been found, select Other instead of the country name before running automatic installation again. You may find that the characters of certain teletext languages are inaccessible for the selected country. Auto volume level : This is a sound control function which aims to equalise the volume level between different channels, and between different programmes on the same channel. Activate or deactivate the auto volume level as required. Programme organisation Return Menu language English Country UK Auto volume level AV1 name AV2 name AV3 name VCR ---CAMC Prog. to be used for reference time 06 Select a station from which you want to get the reference time. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. On models equipped with Virtual Dolby Surround, this function remains inactive if Dolby Virtual has been selected in the SOUND menu (see Volume Control). AV1, AV2, AV3 name : Use these to give a name to each of your audio-visual programmes. Select the character you wish to modify using the Left/Right keys. or keys to display the desired Use the character. Prog. to be used for reference time : key or to use To display the time using the the alarm function, the television clock must be set to the correct time. Select the line marked Prog. to be used for reference time and select a channel which broadcasts teletext. The time is set automatically and is displayed after the channel number. Exit the menu using . www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 10 13:15 Preferences Preferences 1. Display the SUMMARY by pressing and releasing the key on the remote control . 2. Select the line marked Preferences. . 3. Display the menu using Show program. number : If you wish to permanently display the number of the programme you are watching, tick the box using the Left/Right keys. Press the Left/Right keys again to deactivate this function. PREFERENCES Return Show program. number AV2 video input AV3 video input Format control Picture preferences GB Make your choice from the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Video S-Video Auto AV2 video input : Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV2 SCART socket (Video or S-Video). AV3 video input : Use the Left/Right keys to select the type of video signal received at the AV3 sockets (these sockets are located on the front or the side of the television). Format control : Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired picture format: Auto : if the transmitter (for 16/9 format TV’s) or the appliance connected to one of the peripheral jacks delivers the switching signal, the television automatically adapts to the transmitted picture format. 16/9 : manually selects widescreen picture format. 4/3 : manually selects this picture format. If you have selected 16/9 or 4/3, the television will switch back to Auto when you change channels or you switch off. Picture preferences : To access the PICTURE PREFERENCES . menu, press If you wish, you can personalize certain picture settings. Select and set the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Settings : Select Standard or Personal. Standard corresponds to the factory settings. Personal corresponds to the settings that you have entered yourself. The lines Brightness, Colour and Contrast are displayed only if you have selected Personal on the Settings line. Select each line one after the other and enter your required settings. You can recall these picture settings by pressing the red key on the remote control. . Exit the menu using PICTURE PREFERENCES Return Settings Brightness Colour Contrast Personal Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 11 Daily viewing Daily viewing Picture Adjustment GB Display the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select Picture. Validate . The PICTURE menu is displayed. using Select and set the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Brightness, Colour, Contrast, Sharpness: Select each of these lines one after the other and set as required. Contrast expand : Select this line then choose the desired Contrast expand setting (High or Low). Tone : Select this line then choose the desired colour tone (Warm, Neutral or Cold). Exit the menu using . PICTURE Return Brightness Colour Contrast Sharpness Neutral Cold Contrast expand Tone Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. Sound Settings Display the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select the line marked . The SOUND menu Sound. Validate using is displayed. Select and set the proposed options. Use the information below to help you. Sound type : The choices available to you depend on your television model and the broadcast. Stereo, Dual or NICAM reception and the corresponding choices are only available on Stereo or NICAM Stereo televisions. Select this line, then select the type of sound you desire. Sound mode : Select this line, then choose the desired mode using the Left/Right keys. The choices available to you depend on your television model and the type of sound. Magic and Dolby Virtual modes are only available in stereo on TV’s equipped with Virtual Dolby Surround. Stereo wide is only available on Stereo or Nicam televisions not equipped with Virtual Dolby Surround. Balance L/R : Select this line, then balance the sound between the Left and Right loudspeakers. Treble, Bass : Select each of these lines and adjust to suit you. Surround effect : This line appears only if you have selected Dolby Virtual on the Sound mode line. Select this line and adjust the surround effect to suit you. Exit the menu using . SOUND Return Automatic Normal Sound type Sound mode Balance L/R Treble Bass Surround effect Broadcast mono stereo dual NICAM-3 AV Mode Choice automatic - mono mono - stereo sound 1 - sound 2 sound 1 - sound 2 - sound 3 stereo - sound 1 - sound 2 Effect Normal : reproduces the original sound ( mono or stereo). Wide : gives a stereo effect on mono sounds. Stereo wide : accentuates the stereo effect. Magic : accentuates the stereo effects and adds echo. Dolby Virtual : Virtual Dolby Surround. Virtual Surround Dolby is based on Dolby Pro Logic decoding for the reproduction of the Left, Right, Centre and Virtual Surround sound channels using two loudspeakers. “”Dolby”, “”Pro Logic” and the double -D symbol are trademarks of the Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 12 Daily viewing Time Display the SUMMARY using the key on the remote control. Select the line marked . The TIME menu is Time. Validate using displayed. Sleep timer : Use the Left/Right keys to choose how long you wish to view before the television switches off. The television will switch off automatically at the end of this period. To cancel, set to 00:00. One minute before switching off, a message will inform you that the television is about to go off. If you wish to keep it on, press any key on the remote control or the local keyboard. The television switches to Child lock mode after an automatic stop. It can only be switched on again from the remote control. TIME Return Sleep timer 00 : 00 Current time 11 : 28 Wake-up timer Wake-up time Programme number Daily 07 : 07 01 BBC1 GB You can use this menu to switch your television on or off automatically at a set time. Select the line marked Return to return to the previous menu. Current time : The current time is given by the Teletext (see PERSONAL SETTINGS menu). You can also set the time manually using the number keys (0 to 9) on your remote control. Wake-up timer : If you wish to be woken up by your television on the channel of your choice, you must first set the television clock to the correct time (see above). Use the Left/Right keys to tick the box and display the Wake-up timer menu. The lines Wake-up time, Programme number and Daily only appear if you have ticked the box on the line marked Wake-up timer. Wake-up time : Use the number keys (0 to 9) on the remote control to set the time at which you wish to be woken. Programme number : Select the programme you wish to be woken by. Daily : Tick this box if you wish to be awakened at this time every day. . Exit the menu using Set the television to standby using the key on the remote control. The red indicator light on the television flashes. The television will come on automatically at the programmed time and will go off one hour later if you do not use the remote control. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 13 Daily viewing List of Channels GB This list contains up to 10 pages. The number of pages depends on the number of programmes memorized. For each programme, the list indicates the station name or type and the programme number. The 3 AV programmes are listed on page 11. To display the list, press the key on the remote control or key on the remote control. Select the Display the SUMMARY using the . line marked List. Validate using The page displayed is the page containing the programme you are watching. It is identified in the list by the symbol TV. To display the next page, press the Right key. To display the previous page, press the Left key. If you wish to watch one of the programmes on the page displayed: Enter the last digit of the programme number (e.g. for 25 simply enter 5) on the remote control. The list disappears and your programme is selected. Or, - Select the programme using the Up/Down keys. . - Validate using . - Exit the menu using www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 14 LIST Exit 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 BBC 1 BBC 2 FR 3 CC19 ARTE M6 CNN PREM EURO TV Page -/+ Programme: 0 - 9 Daily viewing Selecting Programmes GB For channels 1 to 9, press the number key corresponding to the desired channel on the remote control. For programme numbers higher than 10, press the key on the remote control: ”- -” appears on the screen. Now use the number keys on the remote control to enter first the tens digit then the units digit. If you press while ”- -” is already displayed, the display returns to 0- , in which case you can only select programmes 1 to 9. Scrolling the Programmes You can scroll through the programmes using the / keys. Audio-visual (AV) Programmes Press the key to call the last audio-visual (AV) programme watched. Press repeatedly to scroll the audio-visual (AV) programmes on the screen. Volume Control Use the volume +/- keys to increase or decrease the volume. Muting the Sound Press the key to mute the sound. Press again to restore the sound. Zoom (16/9 models only) This function is useful for 4/3 or letterbox pictures (black bands at the top and bottom of the screen). Use the Left/Right keys to select the desired zoom position: ZOOM 0: 4/3 picture (black bands at the sides). FULL SCREEN: for a 4/3 picture that fills the screen. ZOOM 1: for letterbox pictures. Displaying Information Press the of sound. key to display the following information on the screen: channel number and name, time, zoom, type Television Lock You can use this function to prevent anyone from switching on the television using the buttons on the television set. The buttons on the television set are locked in the following cases: - If you switch off the set by pressing and holding the key on the remote control for more than 3 seconds, - After a programmed stop, - If the television is set to standby when the alarm has been set. When the television is locked the red power will be light flashing. The television can now only be operated from the remote control. To release the lock, press any number key on the remote control. Switching Off the Television To switch off the television, press the Standby key on the remote control or press the ON/OFF switch on the television set. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 15 Teletext Teletext GB Certain channels broadcast an electronic news page service with a range of different information services. The presentation and use of the Teletext differ from one country to another and from one programme to another (Teletext, Fastext or Toptext). Press the key to display the Teletext Index (page 100). A message will inform you if the programme you are watching has no Teletext service. To call up a page: Enter the 3 digits of the page number you wish to consult (for example, 150 or 170). After a moment, the page appears. Use the Left/Right keys to consult the next or the previous page. Standard Functions Rolling pages: Some information is displayed over several sub-pages. It is scrolled on your screen as it is received. . Press again to continue To stop scrolling, select STOP using the Up/Down keys and validate using scrolling. Masked text: To reveal a hidden answer (for example in a quiz programme), select ??? using the Up/Down keys and validate . Press again to hide the answers. using Zoom : Select ZOOM using the Up/Down keys then press the key once to magnify the top of the screen, twice to magnify the bottom of the screen (the page will scroll from top to bottom) and a third time to return to the normal display. Display: You can superpose the Teletext page over the TV picture. To do this, select MIX using the Up/Down keys then validate by pressing the key. Press again to return to the normal display. Sub-code: You can use this to access a sub-page directly. Select “- - - -” using the Up/Down keys. Then enter the four digits of the required sub-page number. Certain programmes have Alarm pages that you can set to appear at the time you require. For example: for 15h30 enter 1530 as the sub-page number then press . You must of course leave the television on the programme which is to transmit the Alarm page. Index: To call up the index page, select 100 using the Up/Down keys then validate using . Direct access: You can use the yellow and blue keys to directly access the pages indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen. Fastext functions: If the Teletext you receive is Fastext, a sub-menu at the bottom of the screen appears which you can use to select from the 4 headings according to its colour. To select a heading, press the key of the corresponding colour. Toptext functions: If the Teletext you receive is TOPtext, the pages are arranged into headings and sub-headings by subject. You can select the first page of a heading directly by pressing the blue key, or the first page of a sub-heading by pressing the yellow key. Other functions: With certain Teletext channels, it is possible to have sub-titles overlaid on the screen for certain broadcasts as well as certain news flash updates. The corresponding page number is indicated in the Telextext index. Once you have found the page, the sub-title or the news flash will be overlaid onto the TV picture. key. The navigation status bar disappears after a few seconds. To display it again, press the or . To exit Teletext, press www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 16 Other Connections Other Connections The CINCH Video and Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connect a VHS or 8mm camcorder. The S and CINCH Audio sockets (1)* are provided to connect a S-VHS or Hi-8 camcorder. GB To use the appliance you have connected, press the key several times until the AV3 programme is selected on the screen. When you switch off the connected appliance, the television will remain on the AV3 programme and you must use the numerical keys on the remote control to select a programme. * on models equipped with this function The headphone socket (2)* is provided to connect a headphone or earphones. Connecting headphones mute the sound from the television loudspeakers. Other Possibilities Copying a cassette: Plug the VCR you wish to record to into the SCART socket AV2. Plug the appliance you wish to copy from as follows: into the peripheral jack AV1 for a VCR; into the CINCH AV3 jacks for a camcorder (see table below). RECORD PLAY Appliance * on models equipped with this function SCART Socket Appliance SCART Socket CALL PROGRAMME Peripheral AV1 VCR ou Camcorder AV2 AV1 Cinches or S-Video AV3 VCR ou Camcorder AV2 AV3 VCR Camcorder Connecting a HiFi or AV amplifier If you wish to connect a HiFi or AV amplifier, plug it into the peripheral jack AV2 using a SCART-CINCH type lead. www.rtv-horvat-dj.hr 17